Toshiba Projection Television 46HM95 User Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL  
Integrated High Definition  
DLP Projection Television  
Compatible with the new Toshiba  
TM  
Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!  
See pages 23 and 50 for details.  
HIGH-DEFINITION TELEVISION  
For an overview of steps for setting up  
and using your new TV, see page 8.  
Note: To display a High Definition picture, the TV must be  
receiving a High Definition signal (such as an over-the-air  
High Definition TV broadcast, a High Definition digital cable  
program, or a High Definition digital satellite program). For  
details, please contact your TV antenna installer or your  
cable or satellite provider.  
Note: If the TV is powered off and then on again quickly  
when the lamp unit is hot, it may take several minutes for  
the picture to appear on-screen. This is a property of DLP  
TV lamp technoplogy and is not a sign of malfunction.  
For details, see “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP  
RESTART” on page 8.  
I
Owner’s Record  
The model number and serial number are on the back  
of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below.  
Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate  
with your Toshiba dealer about this TV.  
46HM95  
52HM95  
62HM95  
Model number:  
Serial number:  
23566650A  
© 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  
All Rights Reserved  
[A-PDFO]  
HM95_R1_001_061505  
6/24/05, 7:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
16) WARNING: This product contains a lamp to project  
Important Safety Instructions  
the picture, and requires special safety precautions:  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
See pages 103105 for instructions on lamp unit  
replacement and care.  
DO NOT attempt to service this product except as  
specified on pages 103–105. The only user-  
serviceable item in this product is the lamp unit.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with a dry cloth.  
Installation, Care, and Service  
Installation  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.  
Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all  
warnings when installing your TV:  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,  
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
17) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications  
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the users authority to  
operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal  
Communications Commission.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades  
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has  
two blades and a third grounding  
Wide blade  
prong. The wide blade or the third  
prong are provided for your safety.  
If the provided plug does not fit into  
your outlet, consult an electrician  
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
18)  
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL  
INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT  
DAMAGE! Never place the TV on  
an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV  
may fall, causing serious personal injury,  
death, or serious damage to the TV.  
10) Protect the power cord from being  
walked on or pinched, particularly at  
plugs, convenience receptacles, and  
the point where it exits the apparatus.  
19) Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid  
areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or  
locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
20) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable  
surface that can support the weight of the unit.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the  
21) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or  
place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled  
with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.  
apparatus. When a cart is used, use  
caution when moving the cart/apparatus  
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
22) Always place the back of the television at least one (1)  
inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to  
allow proper ventilation.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug  
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen  
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to  
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been  
dropped.  
23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV  
cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:  
on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;  
too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or  
14a) Item 14 does not apply to Lamp unit replacement and  
in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,  
or any other place with poor ventilation.  
careon pages 103-105 of this manual.  
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV  
from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation  
of the TV.  
14b) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or  
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does  
not operate normally, take the following precautions:  
ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to  
24) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power  
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is  
subject to wear or abuse.  
avoid possible electric shock or fire.  
To prevent personal injury, never handle the damaged  
television.  
ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV  
any time it has been damaged or dropped.  
25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.  
26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz  
power source only.  
15) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not  
use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle,  
or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely  
to prevent blade exposure.  
(continued on next page)  
3
HM95_R1_002-04_061505  
3
6/24/05, 7:45 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Installation (continued from previous page)  
Care (continued from previous column)  
33) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power  
surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the  
antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or  
unused for long periods of time.  
27) Always make sure the antenna system is properly  
grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage  
surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the  
National Electric Code).  
Antenna lead-in wire  
34) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping  
or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the  
unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become  
frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord  
Antenna discharge unit  
(NEC Section 810-20)  
Ground clamp  
and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
Grounding conductors  
(NEC Section 810-21)  
35) Special care for Texas Instruments Digital Light  
Electric ser vice equipment  
Processing™ (DLP) lamp units:  
The lamp in this product has a limited service life. The  
length of service life varies depending on product use or  
user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its service life:  
Power ser vice grounding  
electrode system (NEC Art 250 Par  
Ground clamps  
you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or  
brightness of the picture, at which time you should  
replace the lamp unit; and  
28)  
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL  
INJURY OR DEATH!  
Use extreme care to make sure you are never in  
a position where your body (or any item you are in contact  
with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally  
touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna  
near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.  
Never attempt to install any of the following during  
lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,  
wires, or any home theater component connected to an  
antenna or phone system.  
the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be  
reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp  
ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is  
replaced.  
See Lamp unit replacement and careon pages 103105.  
Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for  
your area.  
The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of  
mercury may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recycling  
information, please contact your local authorities or  
the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
Care  
For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA  
TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:  
Service  
36  
)
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
Never attempt to service the TV yourself,  
29) Always sit approximately 1025 feet away from the TV and  
as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear  
dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if  
sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV  
off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove  
the source of reflections while viewing the TV.  
except as specified on pages 103105.  
Opening and removing the covers may expose you to  
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow this  
WARNING may result in death or serious injury. Refer all  
servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized  
Service Center.  
30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or  
aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry cloth.  
37) If you have the TV serviced:  
Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer.  
Do not spray volatile compounds, such as insecticide, on  
the cabinet. This may discolor or damage the cabinet.  
Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to  
perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is  
in safe operating condition.  
31)  
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
Never spill liquids or push objects of any  
kind into the TV cabinet slots.  
38) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a  
qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.  
Note: The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may  
be regulated due to environmental considerations. Dispose of  
the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area.  
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local  
authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
32) If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when  
the TV is first delivered), condensation may form on the  
lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the  
color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to  
7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate.  
__________  
Digital Light Processing, DLP™ and the DLP medallion are  
trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
4
HM95_R1_002-04_061505  
4
6/24/05, 7:45 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Important notes about your DLPTM projection TV  
6) Always sit approximately 1025 feet away from the TV and as  
1) The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a  
limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may  
become dark or black or the lamp may fail, at which time you  
must replace the lamp unit. See Lamp unit replacement and  
careon pages 103105.  
directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be  
affected by your viewing position and length of viewing time.  
If you sit too closely to the TV for too long, you may suffer from  
eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4.  
7)  
This TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the  
internal temperature. You may be able to hear the fans  
for several minutes after the TV is turned off. This is a  
function of the Quick Restartfeature and is not a sign of TV  
malfunction. You can set the Quick Restartfeature to stop the  
fans as soon as the TV is turned off. See Setting the Quick  
Restartfeatureon page 51.  
2) If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on  
the TV, the lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will  
switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will  
notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. This is  
normal and is not a sign of malfunction. (See page 75 for  
details.)  
3) Each time you turn on the TV, it may take several minutes for  
8) The green and red LED lights at the bottom center of the TV  
front indicate your TVs current status. If either light flashes, see  
LED indicationson page 99 for details.  
the picture to obtain full brightness.  
4) This TVs display is manufactured using an extremely high level  
of precision technology; however, an occasional pixel (dot of  
light) may show constantly on the screen. This is a structural  
property of DLP(Digital Light Processing) technology in the  
TV and is not a sign of malfunction. Such pixels are not visible  
when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance (see  
item 29 on page 4).  
9) If you unplug the power cord, when you plug the power cord in  
again the message Now Booting…” will display on-screen  
until the picture appears, or the green LED will blink until the  
TV enters standby mode (plugged in but not powered on).  
This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction.  
10) When connecting an external A/V device, if you connect the  
devices video output to the TV and the devices audio output  
to a separate audio system, the picture and sound may not  
synchronize completely.  
5) Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although  
unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a rainbow  
effecton the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye  
fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to technology of this  
type and is not a sign of TV malfunction.  
11) When playing a video game on this TV, there may be a slight  
delay between your command (e.g., joystick, keyboard) and the  
picture movement on the screen.  
Contents  
Important Safety Information ............................................. 2-4  
Important notes about your DLP™ projection TV............... 5  
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 7  
Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices  
through the TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 21  
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices .................................. 22  
Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices ................... 22  
Supported signals ........................................................... 22  
Using TheaterNeton-screen device control .................. 22  
Connecting an AVHD or D-VHS recorder .................... 23  
IEEE1394 device initialization ....................................... 23  
IEEE1394 device management ....................................... 24  
G-LINK® connection ......................................................... 25  
Welcome to Toshiba ...........................................................  
Features of your new TV ....................................................  
7
7
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and  
using your new TV ...................................................... 8  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ............................................ 9  
TV front touchpad and side panel controls  
and connections .............................................................  
9
Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 26  
Learning about the remote control ..................................... 26  
Installing the remote control batteries................................. 28  
Using the remote control MODE button to control  
TV back panel connections ................................................ 10  
Overview of cable types ...................................................... 11  
About the connection illustrations ...................................... 12  
Connecting a digital CableCARD.................................... 12  
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV  
(no Cable box) ............................................................... 13  
Connecting a camcorder..................................................... 13  
Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 14  
Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 15  
Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR,  
your other devices........................................................... 28  
Remote Control functional key chart ................................. 29  
Programming the remote control to operate  
your other devices........................................................... 31  
Multi-brand remote control device codes............................ 33  
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ........................... 35  
Main menu layout .............................................................. 35  
Setup/Installation menu layout ........................................... 36  
Navigating the menu system............................................... 36  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup .............................37  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system ..................... 37  
TV Guide On Screen® Reminder ....................................... 40  
Turning off the TV Guide On Screen®  
and a Cable box.............................................................. 16  
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream®  
(component video) and a VCR ....................................... 17  
Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 18  
Connecting an HDMIor a DVI device to the  
HDMI input .................................................................. 19  
Connecting a digital audio system ...................................... 20  
Connecting an analog audio system.................................... 20  
automatic display feature ................................................ 40  
(Continued on next page)  
5
HM95_R1_005-06_061505  
5
6/24/05, 7:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Contents  
(Continued from previous page)  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV ............................................. 41  
Selecting the menu language............................................... 41  
Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 41  
Programming channels into the TVs channel memory....... 42  
Programming channels automatically .......................... 42  
Manually adding and deleting channels in the  
Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 75  
Selecting the lamp mode .................................................... 75  
Using the POP features ...................................................... 76  
Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 76  
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 77  
POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 77  
Using the FREEZE feature ................................................. 78  
Using the favorite channel scan feature ............................... 78  
Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 79  
Selecting the picture mode .......................................... 79  
Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 79  
Using CableClear® DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 80  
Selecting the color temperature ................................... 80  
Using MPEG Noise Reduction ................................... 81  
Using Dynamic Contrast ............................................ 81  
Using the closed caption mode ........................................... 82  
Advanced closed captions ............................................ 82  
Digital closed captions ................................................ 83  
Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 84  
Muting the sound ....................................................... 84  
Using the digital audio selector ................................... 84  
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts................................... 84  
Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 85  
Using the sub-bass system (SBS) ................................. 85  
Using the StableSound® feature ................................... 85  
Using the SRS WOWsurround sound feature .......... 86  
Turning off the built-in speakers ................................. 86  
Selecting the optical audio output format ................... 86  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio  
player ............................................................................. 87  
Memory card specifications ......................................... 87  
Using the JPEG picture viewer .................................... 88  
Using the MP3 audio player ....................................... 89  
Memory card care and handling .................................. 90  
Setting the ON/OFF timer ................................................ 91  
Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 91  
Displaying the channel banner ........................................... 92  
Understanding the auto power off feature........................... 92  
Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 92  
Using the gray level feature ................................................. 92  
channel memory ..................................................... 43  
Programming your favorite channels .................................. 44  
Setting up and using TheaterNeton-screen  
device control ................................................................. 45  
Setting up TheaterNet................................................. 45  
Using the TheaterNet control icons............................. 46  
TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 4749  
Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 50  
Setting the HDMIaudio mode........................................ 50  
Setting the time and date .................................................... 50  
Viewing the CableCARDmenu ...................................... 51  
Setting the Quick Restart feature ........................................ 51  
Viewing the digital signal meter ......................................... 52  
Viewing the system status ................................................... 52  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen®  
interactive program guide ............................................... 53  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system ..................... 53  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system..................... 54  
TV Guide On Screen® remote control functions ......... 54  
Video Window ........................................................... 55  
Panel Menus ............................................................... 55  
Info Box...................................................................... 56  
TV Guide On Screen® Icons ....................................... 56  
TV Guide On Screen® Services .......................................... 57  
LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 57  
SEARCH screen.......................................................... 58  
RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 60  
SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 61  
Record features ........................................................... 61  
Remind features .......................................................... 63  
SETUP screen ............................................................. 65  
Change system settings .......................................... 65  
Change channel display ......................................... 65  
Change default options .......................................... 66  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu...................................... 93  
Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 93  
If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 93  
Changing your PIN code ................................................... 93  
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) ......... 94  
Blocking channels............................................................... 95  
Unlocking programs temporarily ........................................ 95  
Locking video inputs .......................................................... 95  
Using the GameTimer..................................................... 96  
Using the front panel lock feature ....................................... 96  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features .....................................67  
Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 67  
Labeling the video input sources......................................... 68  
Tuning channels ................................................................. 69  
Using the channel browser .......................................... 69  
Tuning your favorite channels ..................................... 71  
Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 71  
Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or  
unprogrammed) ...................................................... 71  
Switching between two channels using  
Channel Return ...................................................... 71  
Switching between two channels using  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting ................................................97  
General troubleshooting ..................................................... 97  
LED indications ................................................................. 99  
TV Guide On Screen® FAQs.................................... 100102  
SurfLock............................................................... 71  
Selecting the picture size ..................................................... 72  
Natural picture size ..................................................... 72  
TheaterWide 1 picture size.......................................... 73  
TheaterWide 2 picture size.......................................... 73  
TheaterWide 3 picture size.......................................... 73  
Full picture size ........................................................... 73  
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture .................................... 74  
Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 74  
Chapter 11: Appendix ......................................................... 103  
Lamp unit replacement ............................................ 103105  
Specifications ................................................................... 106  
Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 107  
Index .............................................................................. 110, 111  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
6
HM95_R1_005-06_061505  
6
6/24/05, 7:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Introduction  
1
Welcome to Toshiba  
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most innovative DLP™ projection  
TVs on the market. The goal of this manual is to guide you through setting up and  
operating your TV as quickly as possible.  
See “Important notes about your  
DLPprojection TV” on page 5.  
• This manual applies to models 46HM95, 52HM95, and 62HM95. Before you start reading, check the model number on the  
back of your TV.  
• Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control. You also can use the controls on the TV front touchpad if they  
have the same name as those referred to on the remote control. (MENU on the front touchpad functions as ENTER when a  
menu is on-screen or when the TV Guide On Screen® system is open.)  
• The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. See page 9 for front touchpad and  
side panel details. See page 10 for back panel details. See pages 12–25 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV.  
Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for future reference.  
Features of your new TV  
The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD DLPprojection TV:  
Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases).  
TV Guide On Screen® no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).  
Digital CableCARD™ slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 12).  
Digital recording by connecting a D-VHS digital recording device or a Toshiba Symbio  
Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder to  
one of the IEEE1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page 23).  
Memory card slots [SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, MemoryStick, CompactFlash, xD-PictureCard] for viewing JPEG files  
as a “slide show” (page 88) and for playing MP3 files (page 89).  
TheaterNet™ icons for on-screen control of external IR and IEEE1394 devices (page 45).  
Note: After you set up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system (Chapter 5),  
the program guide opens  
automatically by default when  
you turn on the TV. You can turn off  
the automatic program guide (page  
40) and instead press the TV GUIDE  
button on the remote control to  
manually open the program guide.  
Two IEEE1394 ports for multi-device connection and control (page 22).  
Two HDMI (DVI) digital, high-definition multimedia interfaces (page 19).  
Two sets of ColorStream® HD high-resolution component video inputs (pages 15 and 17).  
Dolby Digital* (page 20) and SRS WOW™ (page 86) audio technologies.  
Digital Audio Out optical audio connection (page 20).  
CableClear® DNR digital picture noise reduction (page 80).  
• Double-window POP (page 76) and multi-window Favorites (page 78) features.  
______________  
In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is  
manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following issued  
United States patents 6,498,895; 6,418,556; 6,331,877; 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OR  
AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SYSTEM AND CANNOT GUARANTEE  
SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER  
DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SYSTEM.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
7
HM95_R1_007-08_061505  
7
6/24/05, 8:46 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and using your new TV  
Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features.  
8. See “Learning about the remote control” (page 26) for  
1. Carefully read the important safety, installation, care,  
and service information on pages 2–5. Keep this  
manual for future reference.  
an overview of the buttons on the remote control.  
9. Program the remote control to operate your other  
2. Observe the following when choosing a location for  
device(s) (pages 28–34).  
the TV:  
10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the  
Place the TV on the floor or on the optional TV stand listed in  
the “Specifications” section (page 106).  
power cords for your TV and other devices.  
11. After you plug in the TV power cord, the green LED  
(on the TV front touchpad, to the left of the POWER button)  
will blink while the TV is booting until the remote control is  
usable. When the green LED stops blinking, press POWER to  
turn on the TV.  
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY  
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY  
OR DEATH! Use this TV only with the TOSHIBA TV  
stand listed in the “Specifications” section (page 106). Use with other  
stands may result in instability, causing possible injury or death.  
See “LED indications” on page 99.  
12. See “Menu layout and navigation” for a quick overview  
• Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the  
screen.  
of navigating the TV’s menu system (pages 35–36).  
• Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow  
proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause  
overheating, which will damage the TV. THIS TYPE OF  
DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA  
WARRANTY.  
13. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system (if available in your area).  
14. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® program guide (if available in your area).  
15. Program channels into the TV’s channel memory  
• Read “Installation” on pages 3–4.  
(page 42).  
• Read “Important notes about your DLP™ TV” on page 5.  
16. Set up the TheaterNet™ on-screen device control  
feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system  
components) (page 45).  
3. Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have  
connected all cables and devices to your TV.  
4. BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn  
the functions of the TV’s connections and controls (pages 9  
and 10).  
17. For details on using the memory card JPEG picture  
viewer and MP3 audio player, see page 87.  
18. For details on using the TV’s features, see Chapter 8.  
5. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV  
(pages 12–25).  
19. For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter  
6. Connect the G-LINK® cable (either one of the enclosed IR  
blaster cables) from your VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable) to  
the G-LINK® terminal so you can use the TV Guide On Screen®  
features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only). See page 25.  
10).  
20. For technical specifications and warranty information,  
see Chapter 11.  
21. Enjoy your new TV!  
7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 28).  
IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP RESTART”  
When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit to get hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen  
in the following situations:  
When the Quick Restartfeature is set to OFF and you turn the TV off and then on again within a few minutes.  
If the TV is on when a short-term power failure, power surge, or other similar power failure occurs, such that the TV loses and regains  
power within a few minutes.  
This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction.  
If this occurs, the green LED on the TV front panel will blink (and the red LED will be lit solid) until the TV is finished restarting the lamp  
and the normal picture appears. If BOTH green and red LEDs are blinking at a one-second rate, you will need to turn the TV off and then  
on again to restart the lamp.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
8
HM95_R1_007-08_061505  
8
6/24/05, 8:46 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Connecting your TV  
2
TV front touchpad and side panel controls and connections  
Front of TV  
Side panel  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
Remote sensor  
1
Front touchpad*  
zyx •  
EXIT  
MENU (ENTER)**  
4
3
5
GUIDE  
9
POWER  
6
Side of TV  
VIDEO-3 IN Memory card  
!¡  
slots  
!™  
Green/Red LEDs  
TV/VIDEO Channel zy  
Volume x •  
0
2
7
8
*Gently touch the printed keys on the touchpad.  
**The MENU button on the TV front touchpad functions as the  
ENTER button when a menu is on-screen.  
1
2
Remote sensor (behind the screen) — Point the remote  
control toward this area of the TV screen. See “Remote  
control effective range” on page 27.  
8
VOLUME x • — When no menu is on-screen, these  
buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen,  
these buttons function as left/right menu navigation  
buttons.  
GUIDE — Press to access the TV Guide On Screen®  
program guide. (See page 53 for details on using the  
program guide.)  
TV/VIDEO — Repeatedly press to change the source you are  
viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
HDMI 1, HDMI 2, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream  
HD2).  
9
0
3
4
EXIT — Press to close an on-screen menu instantly.  
Green and Red LEDs  
ARROWS yzx • — When a menu is on-screen, these  
buttons function as up/down/left/right menu navigation  
buttons.  
When the green LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates  
that recording is in progress.  
When the red LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates  
that the TV power cord is plugged in.  
5
6
MENU (ENTER) — Press to access the menu system (see  
page 35). When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide  
On Screen® program guide is open, the MENU button on  
the front touchpad functions as the ENTER button.  
See “LED indications” on page 99 for additional  
information.  
VIDEO-3 — The side panel A/V connections are referred to  
as “VIDEO 3” and include standard A/V connections plus  
optional S-video. (The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V  
connections are on the TV’s back panel; see page 10.  
POWER — Press to turn the TV on and off.  
Note: If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote  
control or TV front panel and you cannot turn off the TV, press  
and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel for 5 or more  
seconds to reset the TV.  
!™ Memory card slots — Insert a memory card into one of  
the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos) as  
a “slide show” on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files (see  
page 87).  
7
CHANNEL yz — When no menu is on-screen, these  
buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see  
page 42). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function  
as up/down menu navigation buttons.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
9
HM95_R2_009-11_061505  
9
6/27/05, 6:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
TV back panel connections  
For an explanation of cable types, see page 11.  
2
3
5 4  
9
8
OUT  
OUT  
1
0
7
!¡  
6
!™  
1 ANT-1 (CABLE) IN and ANT-2 IN Two inputs that  
support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna  
signals and analog and digital (QAM) Cable TV signals.  
8 TheaterNet(IR) OUT — For controlling infrared  
remote-controlled devices through the TV. You can connect  
up to two devices with either one of the enclosed IR blaster  
cables, and then control the devices using the TV’s IR pass-  
through or TheaterNet(on-screen device control) features.  
See pages 21 and 45.  
Note: If you have an antenna only, connect it to ANT-1. If you have  
both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cable TV to ANT-1 and  
the antenna to ANT-2.  
9 Standard Audio IN — For use when connecting a DVI  
device with analog audio output to one of the HDMI  
inputs. See page 19. Also see item 10 below.  
0 (2) HDMIIN 1 and 2 Two High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface inputs receive digital audio and  
uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or  
uncompressed digital video from a DVI device. See page 19.  
2 VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN Two sets of standard  
(composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional  
S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video  
or S-video output.  
NOTE: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry  
only video information; separate audio cables are required for a  
complete connection.  
3 ColorStream® HD-1 and ColorStream® HD-2 Two sets  
of ColorStream® high-definition component video and  
standard stereo audio inputs for connecting devices with  
component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD player  
with ColorStream®. See pages 15 and 17.  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV TO A PERSONAL  
COMPUTER (PC). This TV is not intended for use with a PC.  
(2) IEEE1394 Two bi-directional digital IEEE1394  
ports for connecting multiple devices with compressed  
digital video. Because these ports are bi-directional, they can  
be used for playback and recording. You can control your  
IEEE1394 devices using the TV’s TheaterNet on-screen  
device control icons. See pages 21–24 and 46.  
Note: Component video cables carry only video information;  
separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.  
4 A/V OUT — Standard composite video and analog audio  
outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See  
page 18 for details.  
NOTE:  
IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;  
separate audio cables are not required.  
• NEVER CONNECT THIS TV TO A PERSONAL  
COMPUTER (PC). This TV is not intended for use with a PC.  
5 Variable Audio OUT — Standard analog audio outputs for  
connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers. See  
page 20.  
!™ CableCARDslot — For use with a digital security card  
and digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable  
operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See pages  
12 and 51.  
6 Digital Audio OUT — Optical audio output in Dolby  
Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for  
connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier,  
A/V receiver, or home theater system with optical audio  
input. See page 20.  
7 G-LINK® — For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/  
G-LINK® cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen®  
recording features. See page 25.  
___________  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
10  
HM95_R2_009-11_061505  
10  
6/27/05, 6:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Overview of cable types  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
Coaxial (F-type) cable  
Note: Two dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK® cables are included with your TV. All other required  
cables, if not provided with your other devices, can be purchased at many electronics accessory  
suppliers.  
Standard A/V cables (red/white/yellow)  
S-video cable  
Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna, cable TV service, and/or  
cable converter box to the ANT-1 and/or ANT-2 RF inputs on your TV.  
Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are for use  
with video devices with standard audio and standard (composite) video output. These  
cables (and the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-coded according to use:  
yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio.  
Component video cables (red/green/blue)  
S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables  
are required for a complete connection.  
Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable. If  
you connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable or  
the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
HDMI cable  
Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with  
component video output. (ColorStream® is Toshiba’s brand of component video.)  
These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are  
required for a complete connection.  
IEEE1394 cable (4-pin)  
Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite)  
video or S-video cable.  
HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format.  
This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, separate audio cables are  
not required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 19 for further details.  
Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK® cable  
(2 included)  
Note: HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or  
S-video cable.  
IEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output  
that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. This cable carries both video and audio  
information; therefore, no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.  
See pages 22–24.  
Optical audio cable  
Note: Although your TV includes both HDMI  
and IEEE1394 connections, it may not  
operate with another device you have that  
includes such a connection. For example, the  
IEEE1394 ports are not intended to operate  
with current model Mini DV camcorders, and  
the HDMI input is not intended for  
Note:  
The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400  
(400 Mbps maximum).  
IEEE1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite)  
video or S-video cable.  
®
Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK cable is for use with video devices with IR (infrared)  
connection to a computer. Copyright  
remote control. Two of these cables are included with your TV. One is for connection  
to the G-LINK® terminal (page 25) to enable TV Guide On Screen® recording features  
(Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV’s IR pass-through feature (page  
21) and TheaterNeton-screen device control feature (page 45).  
protection requirements may also prohibit or  
limit connectivity. See page 19 for details  
about the HDMI input. See pages 2224 for  
details about the IEEE1394 ports.  
Note: The two IR blaster/G-LINK® cables included with your TV have specific characteristics that  
allow them to work properly with this TVs IR OUT and G-LINK® ports. Never use other  
aftermarket IR blaster or G-LINK® cables with this TV. Other cables may not function  
properly and can cause damage. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR  
TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM  
(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
terminal. See page 20.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
11  
HM95_R2_009-11_061505  
11  
6/27/05, 6:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
About the connection illustrations  
You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in  
this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those  
illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device’s owner’s manual.  
Connecting a digital CableCARD™  
This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital  
basic, and digital premium cable television programming by  
direct connection to a cable system providing such  
programming.  
To view encrypted digital channels:  
1. Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT-1.  
2. With the front of the CableCARDfacing up, insert it into  
the CableCARDslot on the back of the TV (see  
illustration below left).  
3. After the CableCARDis inserted, a CableCARDoption  
appears in the Applications menu, with informational  
screens provided by your digital CableCARDservice. See  
page 51 for additional information.  
A security card (such as a digital CableCARD™), provided by  
your cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital  
programming.  
Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as  
video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide,  
and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the  
use of a CableCARDand may require the use of a separate set-  
top box from your cable operator.  
CableCard Connected -- Acquiring  
channel information.  
Applications  
For more information, call your local cable operator.  
You will need:  
one digital CableCARD(contact your cable operator)  
CableCard services will only operate  
TV Guide On Screen  
Audio Player  
IP Service  
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.  
Conditional Access  
CableCARD(tm) Status  
Network Setup  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
CableCARD  
CableCARD(tm) Pairing  
digital cable subscription service (contact your cable  
operator)  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
TV back panel  
Note:  
OUT  
• Always use the EJECT button to remove the CableCARD™. Never  
remove the CableCARD™ carelessly.  
• Never insert any object or card (including, without limitation, a  
PCMCIA card) other than a CableCARD™ into the CableCARD™  
slot.  
• Always make sure the CableCARD™ is facing the correct direction.  
• Connect the cable for your digital cable TV service to ANT-1 only.  
• When using a CableCARD™, channel programming is unnecessary  
because the CableCARD™ automatically loads the cable channel  
list into the TV’s channel memory (page 42).  
• The CableCARD™ may take up to 5 minutes to “pair” with the TV  
and download channel information. CableCARD™ information and  
channels will not be available until this process is completed.  
From digital Cable service  
(connect to ANT 1 only)  
CableCARD™ technology, like all new and emerging technology, may  
from time to time experience compatibility issues due to the different  
ways in which television manufacturers and cable system operators  
implement the CableCARD™ specifications. Most issues can be easily  
resolved. If you experience any performance-related CableCARD™  
issues with your Toshiba television, please contact Toshiba  
This cable should be connected to ANT 1 terminal directly. If you connect  
the cable via a VCR, the TV may not receive the signals correctly.  
Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or by visiting  
http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.  
________  
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
12  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
12  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV (no Cable box)  
You will need:  
one signal splitter  
From Cable TV or antenna  
IN  
three coaxial cables  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
Signal splitter  
OUT  
OUT  
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an  
Stereo VCR  
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard  
video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cables  
to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture  
performance will be unacceptable.  
VIDEO  
AUDI
L
R
IN from ANT  
OUT to TV  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT  
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your  
VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.  
L
R
TV  
To view the antenna or Cable signal:  
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*  
OUT  
To view the VCR:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  
on the TV.*  
To use the TV Guide On Screen® recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT  
terminals on the TV (see illustration).  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the  
appropriate input mode is selected.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
Connecting a camcorder  
You will need:  
Camcorder  
one set of standard A/V cables  
• For better picture performance, if your camcorder has S-video, use an  
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.  
Do not connect both an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO  
3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
VIDEO AUDIO  
OUT  
L
R
To view the camcorder video:  
Select the VIDEO 3 video input source on the TV.*  
______________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control (see page 67).  
To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.  
VIDEO 3 inputs on TV right side panel  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
13  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
13  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a VCR and Cable box  
You will need:  
From Cable TV  
one signal splitter  
five coaxial cables  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
IN  
Cable box  
OUT  
Signal splitter  
OUT  
IN  
CH 3  
CH 4  
OUT  
Stereo VCR  
• For better picture performance from your VCR: If your VCR has  
S-video, connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead  
of the standard video cable. Do not connect an S-video cable and  
a standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time  
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
VIDEO  
AUDI
L
R
IN from ANT  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT to TV  
OUT  
L
R
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your  
VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.  
TV  
OUT  
• When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to use the remote  
control to program or access certain features on the TV.  
To view basic Cable channels and use the TV’s features:  
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* Use the  
TV controls (front panel or remote control) to change  
channels and access the TV’s features.  
To view basic and premium Cable channels:  
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source  
on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever  
channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box  
controls to change channels.  
To view the VCR:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  
on the TV.*  
Note: A VIDEO 1 connection with an S-Video cable (instead  
of a standard video cable) will provide better picture  
performance (as mentioned in the first bulleted item at the  
top of this page).  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the  
appropriate input mode is selected.  
To enable the TV Guide On Screen® system to work  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
with your cable box and to use the TV Guide  
On Screen® recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT  
terminals on the TV (see illustration).  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
14  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
14  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver  
From antenna  
You will need:  
one signal splitter  
four coaxial cables  
IN  
Signal splitter  
OUT  
OUT  
one set of component video cables (if your  
satellite receiver does not have component  
video, connect the standard A/V cables only)  
Stereo VCR  
VIDEO  
AUDI
L
IN from ANT  
OUT to TV  
one pair of standard audio cables  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
OUT  
L
R
• For better picture performance, if your satellite  
receiver and VCR have S-video, connect S-video  
cables (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard  
video cables. Do not connect both types of video  
cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or  
the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
TV  
OUT  
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the  
TV (VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s AUDIO OUT terminal  
using the white audio cable only.  
To view satellite programs using the component video  
connections:  
Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the  
TV.*  
From satellite dish  
To view satellite programs using the standard  
video connections or to record satellite programs:  
Satellite receiver  
AUDIO  
L OUT  
Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate  
line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details).  
Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*  
L
Y
P
B
PR  
Satellite  
IN  
R
R
S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,  
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate  
input mode is selected.  
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want  
to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the  
TV.*  
To use the TV Guide On Screen® recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT  
terminals on the TV (see illustration).  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
Note: The TV Guide On Screen® system does not receive  
program listings from or for any satellite service.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
15  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
15  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, and a Cable box  
From antenna or Cable TV  
You will need:  
one signal splitter  
five coaxial cables  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
IN  
Cable box  
OUT  
Signal splitter  
OUT  
IN  
CH 3  
CH 4  
OUT  
Stereo VCR  
Note: If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV  
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white  
audio cable only.  
VIDEO  
AUDI
L
R
IN from ANT  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT to TV  
OUT  
one S-video cable  
one pair of standard audio cables  
Note:  
L
R
TV  
OUT  
• If your DVD player does not have S-video, use a standard  
video cable instead. Do not connect an S-video cable and a  
standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same  
time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
If your DVD player has component video, see page 17.  
Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of  
A/V inputs on the TV. (See the illustration, which shows the  
VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV, and the DVD player  
connected to VIDEO 2.)  
To view basic channels and access the TVs features:  
Select the ANT 1 video input source.* Use the TV  
controls to change channels and access the TV’s features.  
AUDIO  
OUT  
L
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
R
To view premium Cable channels:  
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input  
source on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4  
(whichever channel the Cable box output is set to).  
Use the Cable box controls to change channels.  
DVD player with S-video  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,  
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate input  
mode is selected.  
Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to  
use the remote control to program or access certain  
features on the TV.  
To view the DVD player:  
To enable the TV Guide On Screen® system to work with  
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video  
input source on the TV.*  
your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen®  
recording features:  
To view the VCR:  
1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions on  
page 25.  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input  
source on the TV.*  
_____________  
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT terminals  
on the TV (see illustration).  
*
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR  
owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of  
television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is  
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other  
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen®  
system.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
16  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
16  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video) and a VCR  
Your TV has ColorStream® (component video) inputs.  
From antenna or Cable  
You will need:  
IN  
Signal splitter  
OUT  
one signal splitter  
OUT  
three coaxial cables  
Stereo VCR  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
VIDEO  
AUDI
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an  
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard  
video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cable to  
VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture  
performance will be unacceptable.  
L
R
IN from ANT  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT to TV  
OUT  
L
R
TV  
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV  
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white  
audio cable only.  
OUT  
one pair of standard audio cables  
one set of component video cables  
You can connect the component video cables (plus audio  
cables) from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream  
terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The ColorStream HD-1  
and HD-2 terminals can be used with Progressive (480p,  
720p) and Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems. A 1080i  
signal will provide the best picture performance.  
• If your DVD player does not have component video, see page  
16. If your DVD player has HDMI video, see page 19.  
AUDIO  
OUT  
To view antenna or Cable channels:  
Y
PB  
PR  
L
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
OUT  
R
To view the DVD player:  
DVD player with component video  
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HD-1  
video input source on the TV.*  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,  
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate  
input mode is selected.  
To view the VCR:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input  
source on the TV.*  
To record a TV program while watching a DVD:  
To use the TV Guide On Screen® recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to  
record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source  
on the TV* to view the DVD.  
_____________  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT  
terminals on the TV (see illustration).  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
17  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
17  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting two VCRs  
From antenna or Cable  
You will need:  
one signal splitter  
three coaxial cables  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
IN  
Signal splitter  
OUT  
**  
OUT  
• For better picture performance, if VCR 1 has S-video, use  
an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the  
standard video cable. However, do not connect both types  
of video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time  
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
VCR1 (plays)  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L
R
IN from ANT  
OUT to TV  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT  
L
R
• If VCR 1 has mono audio, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)  
to the audio out terminal on VCR 1 using the white audio cable  
only.  
TV  
OUT  
a
• Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input terminals on  
the TV at the same time.  
To view the antenna or Cable signal:  
Select the ANT-1 video input source on the TV.*  
b
To view VCR 1:  
Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  
on the TV.*  
To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:  
Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line  
input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Select  
the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*  
VCR2 (records)  
VIDEO  
AUDI
R
IN from ANT  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
L
Note:  
OUT  
OUT to TV  
L
R
• If you have a Cable box, connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1  
as shown on page 14.  
L
R
• The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision® copyright  
protection technology, which may prevent you from recording certain  
copy-restricted video materials.***  
a
The VIDEO OUT terminal does not output the POP picture.  
b
When POP mode is active, the AUDIO OUT terminals output the  
sound of the active window (main or POP). For additional  
information, see “Notes about recording” on page 76.  
_________________________________________________________________  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when  
the appropriate input mode is selected.  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
** Do not connect the unit through a VCR. Video signals fed through VCRs may be  
affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will be distorted on the TV.  
To use the TV Guide On Screen® recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK® cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
*** This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other  
limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision is a registered  
trademark of Macrovision Corporation.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT  
terminals on the TV (see illustration).  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® system.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
18  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
18  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting an HDMIor a DVI device to the HDMI input  
The HDMI[1] input on your TV receives digital audio and  
uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or  
uncompressed digital video from a DVI[2] device.  
This input is designed to accept HDCP[3] program material in  
digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B–compliant[4] consumer  
electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with  
HDMI or DVI output).  
__________________________________________________________________  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
HDMI = High-Definition Multimedia Interface.  
DVI = Digital Video Interface.  
HDCP = High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection.  
EIA/CEA-861/861B compliance covers the transmission of  
uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content  
protection, which is being standardized for reception of high-definition  
video signals. Because this is an evolving technology, it is possible that  
some devices may not operate properly with the TV.  
The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 720p  
signals but will also accept and display 1080i, 480i, and 480p  
signals.  
NOTE: To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset  
properly, it is recommended that you follow these  
procedures:  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
• When turning on your electronic components, turn on  
the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device.  
• When turning off your electronic components, turn off  
the HDMI or DVI device first, and then the TV.  
To connect an HDMI device, you will need:  
• one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI  
device  
To connect a DVI device, you will need:  
For proper operation, it is recommended that you use as  
short an HDMI cable as possible. You should not  
encounter difficulty if you use an HDMI cable shorter than  
16.4 ft (5m).  
• one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A  
connector) per DVI device  
For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to-DVI adapter  
cable should not exceed 9.8 ft (3m). The recommended length is  
6.6 ft (2m).  
HDMI cable transfers both video and audio. Separate  
analog audio cables are not required (see illustration  
below). Some CDVs (video CDs) may not output digital  
audio signals. In that case, you may hear sound by  
connecting analog audio cables.  
• one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI  
device  
An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only.  
Separate analog audio cables are required (see illustration  
below).  
See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 50.  
See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 50.  
HDMI device  
DVI device  
DVI/HDCP  
OUT  
HDMI OUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
IN  
L
L
R
IN  
L
L
OUT  
R
OUT  
R
TV  
TV  
OUT  
OUT  
___________  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
19  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
19  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a digital audio system  
Dolby Digital decoder or  
other digital audio system  
The TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby*  
Digital or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code  
modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital  
decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input.  
Optical  
Audio IN  
LINE IN  
L
R
You will need:  
TV  
one optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has  
the larger “TOSlink” connector and not the smaller  
“mini-optical” connector.)  
To control the audio:  
Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.  
Press MENU on the TV’s  
remote control and open  
Audio  
the AUDIO menu.  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Highlight Audio Setup and  
Audio Setup  
press ENTER.  
In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby Digital  
or PCM, depending on your device (see “Selecting the optical  
audio output format” on page 86).  
Note:  
• Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream  
signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard  
optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level  
that may damage speakers or headphones. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT  
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.  
Audio Setup  
MTS  
Stereo  
English  
Language  
Speakers  
On  
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs signals only when receiving  
digital broadcasts with the TV in single-window mode.  
Optical Output Format  
Dolby Digital  
Reset  
Done  
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio  
sources because of copy restrictions.  
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers in the same Audio Setup  
menu (above). Also see “Turning off the built-in speakers” on  
page 86.  
___________  
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and  
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Connecting an analog audio system  
This connection allows you to use external speakers with an  
external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level.  
Analog audio amplifier  
LINE IN  
You will need:  
L
R
one pair of standard audio cables  
To control the audio:  
TV  
Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier.  
OUT  
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers (see “Turning off the built-in  
speakers” on page 86).  
Note: To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier,  
the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a  
reasonable listening level.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
20  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
20  
6/24/05, 9:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR pass-through)  
Front of IR-controlled DVD player (for example)  
You can use the TV’s IR OUT terminal (infrared pass-through)  
to remotely operate (through the TV) many infrared remote-  
controlled devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote-controlled  
VCR or DVD player) enclosed within an entertainment center  
or similar cabinet. Without the IR OUT connection, the device  
typically would need to be visible to operate it remotely.  
Front of IR-controlled audio device (for example)  
You will need:  
one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)  
other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s)  
Infrared  
sensor  
to the TV (see pages 13–20)  
To connect the IR blaster cable:  
IR blaster cable wand  
(approx. 1 inch from device)  
Back of TV  
1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device. This  
sensor is marked on some devices.*  
2. Align one of the IR blaster cable’s wands about 1 inch away  
OUT  
from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and  
attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a  
second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner.  
(See illustration at right.)  
Note: If you do not have a second device, coil the second wand  
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.  
3. Plug the IR blaster cable’s plug into one of the TV’s  
TheaterNet OUT terminals.  
To control the device(s):  
Point the TV remote control  
(programmed to operate the  
device; see Chapter 3) or the  
device’s remote control at the front  
of the TV and press the button for  
the desired function. The signal  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
passes from the remote control  
through the TV to the device via  
the IR blaster cable.  
TheaterNeton-screen device control  
Note:  
• If you use the device’s remote  
control to operate the device, you  
also will need to use the TV’s remote control to operate the TV.  
For additional control options  
for your home theater system,  
set up the TheaterNet on-  
Toshiba  
Video 3  
• For additional control options, see “TheaterNet on-screen device  
control” at right.  
screen device control feature.  
You can use this feature to  
control many IR remote-  
controlled devices and  
IEEE1394 devices using the  
on-screen control icons.  
ENTER  
TOP MENU  
EXIT  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
*
If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:  
1. Turn OFF the device.  
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the  
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the  
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote  
control for this step.)  
3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched  
the device is the location of the sensor.  
See pages 45–49 for details on  
setting up and using TheaterNet.  
See pages 22–24 for details on  
connecting IEEE1394 devices.  
Note: The TheaterNet on-screen icons are the only device functions  
available when the icons are on-screen. To access other device  
functions, close the TheaterNet icon window.  
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the  
right and press POWER again.  
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
21  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
21  
6/24/05, 9:13 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices  
You can use the two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports on the back  
of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA  
specifications for IEEE1394.  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both  
playback and recording.  
Supported signals  
• Because IEEE1394 is an evolving technology, it is possible that some  
or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV  
through the IEEE1394 ports may not operate. You should confirm  
that the devices you want to use with the IEEE1394 ports will operate  
with those ports.  
The IEEE1394 ports support only the signals listed below. Even  
though incompatible video, audio, and digital control signals  
cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be passed  
through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices.  
Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNetmenu.  
• This TV does not support all possible IEEE1394 signal types. For  
information on signals supported by the IEEE1394 ports, see  
“Supported signals” at right.  
• MPEG-2 digital video signals  
• IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;  
separate audio cables are not required.  
Other digital video signals—such as DV video—are  
incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and  
sent to the TV as analog video (composite or S-video).  
You will need:  
• Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals  
Other digital audio signals (such as DPM, MP3, and DTS) are  
incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV.  
one (or two) IEEE1394 cables  
Note: The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this  
TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).  
additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible  
• EIA-775 and AV/C digital control  
(see “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” below).  
Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices  
that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE1394  
control standards (described below).  
TV back panel  
The TV cannot control IEEE1394 devices that use any other  
control standards.  
EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as  
Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this  
standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box  
through IEEE1394.  
AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such  
as power, play, stop rewind, fast-forward, pause, and  
record), as applicable to the specific device.  
}
Two bi-directional  
IEEE1394 ports  
Using TheaterNeton-screen device  
control  
From IEEE1394  
devices (such as  
AVHD or D-VHS)  
You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394  
devices using on-screen control icons. See page 45 for details on  
setting up and using the TheaterNet feature.  
Using analog-compatible IEEE1394  
devices  
Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog  
signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play  
VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play  
analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog  
programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the  
IEEE1394 device’s analog features, you need to connect the  
device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus  
audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable.  
Note: If the TheaterNet feature does not control your  
IEEE1394 device, you can either use the device’s remote  
control or try using IR pass-through with the TV’s remote  
control (page 21).  
Note: If you have an IEEE1394 device connected to both digital  
and analog inputs on the TV, the TV automatically switches  
between digital and analog modes, as needed, when the initial  
device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button.  
See page 45 for details on using the TheaterNet feature.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
22  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
22  
6/24/05, 9:13 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)  
Connecting an AVHD (external hard  
drive) or D-VHS digital recorder  
IEEE1394 device initialization  
When you connect a new IEEE1394 device to the TV and turn  
it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV  
(and other networked IEEE1394 devices, if any), and the  
following device initialization screen automatically appears.  
You can connect an IEEE1394 compatible D-VHS or AVHD  
(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba’s  
SymbioAVHD Recorder) to record high definition and  
standard definition material from either tuner and control live  
TV (pause, rewind, etc.).  
Note: With some devices, it may take up to one minute for this  
screen to appear.  
1. If you also connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog  
input, use the yzx • buttons to select the input in the  
ANALOG INPUT USED field; otherwise, leave it set to  
“None.” (See “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices”  
on page 22.)  
When you connect a D-VHS or AVHD device to the TV:  
• The remote control keys (LIVE, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, FF, etc.) are  
automatically activated to allow control of live TV.  
• The TV Guide On Screen® system is automatically configured to  
allow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 for details.  
Also see page 50 for details on setting the AVHD device skip time.  
2. If you want to label the device, highlight Edit Label and  
press ENTER.  
• Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection  
restrictions.  
New IEEE1394 Device Initilization  
Manufacturer  
Device Type  
Custom Label  
TOSHIBA  
AVHD  
This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba  
TM  
Edit Label  
Done  
3. Press the yzx • buttons to select a character for the first  
Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!  
Toshiba’s Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is designed specifically for  
high definition television (HDTV) and offers control over digital  
video recording and playback.  
space and then press ENTER.  
4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.  
5. Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information.  
Think of it as a “tapeless VCR” for digital television. You can pause,  
rewind, or use instant replay, so you’ll never miss a thing!  
IEEE1394 Device Label Edit  
M Y D E V I C E _  
Symbio also offers one-touch recording* of both standard and  
High Definition programs through the no-fee TV Guide  
On Screen® interactive program guide built in to this TV.  
A
H
O
V
2
B
I
C
J
D
K
R
Y
5
E
L
S
Z
6
F
M
T
0
G
N
U
1
P
W
3
Q
X
4
7
8
9
SPC  
CLR  
BS  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
Done  
Exit  
Note:  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
• The TV may not recognize incompatible or non-A/V IEEE1394  
devices; however, these devices may still be available to other  
compatible IEEE1394 devices on the network.  
You may be able to use the TV’s remote control to operate some  
compatible IEEE1394 devices. You must first program the  
remote control to recognize the device (see Chapter 3). If you  
have an IEEE1394 Cable box or satellite receiver, you may need  
to use the remote control that came with the device.  
*Note: To enjoy the full benefits of your Symbio AVHD Recorder, you must  
first set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (see Chapter 5). Full Symbio  
AVHD Recorder benefits, including Intelligent One Touch recording, will not  
be available unless the TV Guide On Screen® system is fully operational.  
However, when the TV Guide On Screen® system is not fully operational,  
manual recording is available as long as the TV Guide On Screen® system  
has acquired the necessary date and time data. If you experience any  
issues with your Symbio AVHD Recorder, please contact Toshiba  
Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or visiting  
Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE1394 device  
other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder.  
http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
23  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
23  
6/24/05, 9:13 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)  
IEEE1394 device management  
Important information regarding IEEE1394  
device interconnection  
The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV’s memory.  
You can edit this device information (for example, edit the  
device name, change the analog input information, or delete the  
device information from the TV’s memory if you no longer use  
that device).  
Never loop the last device in the chain back to the TV.  
If the device chain is looped, the TV may not work properly with the  
other devices in the chain.  
Always place devices with the slowest communication  
speed at the end of each chain. If a device with a slower  
communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the  
chain, the signal from the slower device will interfere with the signal  
from the faster device. To determine the communication speed of  
an IEEE1394 device, look for an “S” number near the device’s  
IEEE1394 connector. The higher the “S” number, the faster the  
device. If your device is not marked with an “S” number, look in the  
device’s user manual or call the device manufacturer’s technical  
support number.  
To edit the IEEE1394 device information:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in  
step 3 below).  
Setup  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
If your IEEE1394 device has a two-position power  
switch, always place the device at the end of the chain  
and turn ON the power switch when any device is used.  
If the power switch is OFF, it will interfere with signals from devices  
behind it in the chain.  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
The maximum length for an IEEE1394 cable between  
each device is 15 feet.  
3. Open the Devices menu, highlight IEEE1394 Devices, and  
press ENTER.  
• This TV is an IEEE1394A device. The IEEE1394B protocol is faster  
and intended to allow for longer distances between devices and  
multi-room systems. IEEE1394A–to–IEEE1394B converters  
(available at some electronics suppliers) may allow compatibility of  
IEEE1394B devices with your existing IEEE1394A devices.  
Devices  
IEEE1394 Devices  
TheaterNet Devices  
• The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this TV  
must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER.  
IEEE1394 Device Management  
Brand  
Type  
Label  
Analog Input Used Connected  
No  
TOSHIBA  
AVHD MY DEVICE None  
Reset  
Done  
5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify the device  
information.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
24  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
24  
6/24/05, 9:13 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
G-LINK® connection  
• This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen® system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to  
enable the TV Guide On Screen® recording features with your VCR.  
• This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 23 and 50 for further details.  
After you connect your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK® cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables  
included with your TV) from your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK® terminal on the TV.  
Note: TV Guide On Screen® program data is available through the ANT-1 and ANT-2 antenna inputs and also through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you  
have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1. TV Guide On Screen® program data is not available through any other inputs on this TV. See the  
connection information on pages 13–25.  
The G-LINK® connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screen® system:  
• If you have a Cable box, you need to connect the G-LINK® cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK® terminal to receive the  
TV Guide On Screen® program listings for your Cable service.  
• If you have a VCR, you need to connect the G-LINK® cable from the VCR to the G-LINK® terminal to use the TV Guide  
On Screen® recording features.  
To connect to the G-LINK® terminal:  
Front of Cable box  
1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or  
Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.*  
2. Align one of the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable’s wands about  
1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the  
VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape.  
Front of VCR  
If you have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar  
manner. (See illustration at right.)  
Note: If you do not have a Cable box, coil the second wand  
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.  
Infrared  
3. Plug the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable’s plug into the TV’s  
sensor  
G-LINK® terminal.  
G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable wand  
(approx. 1 inch from device)  
For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system:  
Back of TV  
See Chapter 5.  
OUT  
For details on using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive  
program guide:  
See Chapter 7.  
*
If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:  
1. Turn OFF the device.  
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the  
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the  
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote  
control for this step.)  
3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched  
the device is the location of the sensor.  
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the  
right and press POWER again.  
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
25  
HM95_R1_012-25_061505  
25  
6/24/05, 9:13 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Using the remote control  
3
Learning about the remote control  
The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a  
complete list of the remote control’s functions, see the remote control  
functional key chart on pages 29–30.  
For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen® system,  
see page 54.  
POWER turns the TV on and off.  
Note: The Quick Restart setting will affect the amount of time it takes for  
the picture to appear when you turn on the TV. See page 51 for details.  
SLEEP accesses the sleep timer (page 91).  
LIGHT The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns  
on the Illumination mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any  
key lights the keypad for 5 seconds (10 seconds if you’re in programming  
mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning  
the Illumination mode on and off.  
Channel Numbers (0–9, –/100) directly tune channels. The “–” button is  
used to tune digital channels (page 71) or to display the favorite channel  
list (page 44).  
INPUT selects the video input source (page 67).  
MODE cycles through the six remote control device modes: TV, CBL/SAT,  
VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and AUDIO2. The mode indicator light  
will remain lit for a few seconds (page 28).  
PIC SIZE cycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/  
3, and Full (page 72).  
TheaterNet™ DEVICE displays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page  
45).  
TheaterNet™ CTRL accesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 46).  
MENU accesses the main TV menu system (pages 35 and 36) or opens a  
menu in the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 7).  
TV GUIDE opens the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 7).  
INFO provides detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide  
On Screen® system (Chapter 7).  
ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the  
TV Guide On Screen® system.  
Arrow buttons (yz x •) When a menu is on-screen, these buttons select or  
adjust programming menus. (Also see  
x /  
on the next page.)  
CH yz cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen  
(42) and functions as page up/down when a menu is on-screen or when the  
TV Guide On Screen® system is open (Chapter 7).  
Note: The error message “Not  
Available” will appear if you press a  
key for a function that is not available  
VOL yz adjusts the volume level.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
26  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
26  
6/24/05, 9:26 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Learning about the remote control (continued)  
EXIT closes on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen® system.  
CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel (page 71), or stops the picture viewer slide show  
(page 88).  
Live returns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record to the  
Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder (pages 23 and 50).  
RECALL displays TV setting information on-screen (page 92).  
MUTE reduces or turns off the sound (page 84).  
TV/VCR selects TV mode to view one program while recording another.  
|
|
SKIP/SEARCH SS and TT jump forward and backward one day in the  
TV Guide On Screen® listings (Chapter 7).  
LIST displays the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder play list (if available) (page 23).  
FAV CH yz tunes to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 44).  
HOME (  
)
accesses the home function of the channel browser feature (page 69)  
x /  
While watching TV, these buttons open the channel browser banner and tune to  
the previous/next channel in the channel history (page 69). (Also see “Arrow buttons” on  
previous page.)  
SPLIT turns the POP feature on and off (page 76) or locks/unlocks the TV Guide On Screen®  
video window.  
PIC MODE selects the picture mode (page 79).  
FAV SCAN accesses the favorite channel search function (page 78).  
FREEZE accesses the freeze feature (page 78).  
Remote control  
effective range  
For optimum performance, aim the remote  
control directly at the TV and make sure  
there is no obstruction between the  
remote control and the TV.  
Point remote control  
toward remote sensor  
on front of TV.  
16.4 ft (5m)  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
27  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
27  
6/24/05, 9:26 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Installing the remote control batteries  
To install the remote control batteries:  
Caution:  
Never throw batteries into a fire.  
CAUTION: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location. Never  
throw batteries into a fire.  
Note:  
1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control.  
Be sure to use AA size batteries.  
Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.  
Batteries should always be disposed of with the  
environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in  
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.  
If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the  
operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries  
with new ones.  
2. Install two “AA” size alkaline batteries. Match the + and – symbols on  
the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment.  
When necessary to replace batteries in the remote  
control, always replace both batteries with new ones.  
Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in  
combination.  
Always remove batteries from remote control if they are  
dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an  
extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid  
from leaking into the battery compartment.  
3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps.  
Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices  
Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable  
multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2. The  
default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below.  
Note: The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices. If  
you own a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not  
preprogrammed to operate, you will need to program the remote control. See  
“Programming the remote control to operate your other devices” on page 31.  
Number (1-6)  
MODE  
MODE  
1) TV  
Default device mode control (before programming)  
Toshiba TV  
2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver  
3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR  
4) DVD  
Toshiba DVD  
5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver  
6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD  
MODE  
1) TV  
Device mode control after programming  
Toshiba TV  
Note:  
Although your new TV’s remote control includes  
codes for many devices, it may not include  
codes for some or all of the features on certain  
devices you wish to control. If you are unable to  
program the TV’s remote control to operate  
your device or some of the features on that  
device, use the device’s remote control or the  
controls on the device.  
2) CBL/SAT  
3) VCR/PVR  
4) DVD  
Multi-brand video/audio devices  
5) AUDIO 1  
6) AUDIO 2  
You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding  
number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE button.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
28  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
28  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Remote Control functional key chart  
Toshiba TV  
(TV)  
Cable  
Satellite  
VCR  
DVD/LD  
Receiver  
(AUDIO)  
CD  
(AUDIO)  
PVR  
(VCR)  
Key Label  
(CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT)  
MODE  
Remote control device mode selection  
Lights the remote key, and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode.*1  
LIGHT  
SLEEP  
Sleep timer ---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Power  
---  
POWER  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
100  
Power  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
+10  
Power  
Power  
1
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
---  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
AV input 1 Digit 1  
AV input 2 Digit 2  
AV input 3 Digit 3  
AV input 4 Digit 4  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
2
3
4
5
CD  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
6
Tuner  
Phono  
Cassette  
Aux  
7
8
9
0
---  
Digit 0, 10 Digit 0  
100/–  
– (digital  
– (sub  
---  
---  
---  
- separator)  
channel)  
INPUT  
TV/Video  
select  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
PIC SIZE  
Selects the  
TV  
image shape.  
MENU/  
ACTION  
Menu/  
Guide Menu  
---  
Action,  
Menu  
---  
Menu  
---  
---  
Menu  
TV GUIDE/SETUP TV Guide ---  
INFO/TITLE Guide Info ---  
Guide  
INFO  
---  
---  
DVD setup ---  
---  
---  
Guide  
INFO  
TITLE=  
Top menu  
---  
---  
---  
---  
TheaterNet  
TheaterNet ---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Subtitle  
Audio  
Enter  
---  
---  
ADVANCE  
---  
DEVICE/SUBTITLE Device  
TheaterNet  
CTRL/AUDIO  
TheaterNet ---  
Control  
ENTER  
Enter  
---  
Enter, Select ---  
---  
---  
Enter  
y
Menu select ---  
up  
Menu select ---  
up  
Menu select ---  
up  
Menu select  
up  
z
Menu select ---  
down  
Menu select ---  
down  
Menu select ---  
down  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Menu select  
down  
x •  
Menu select ---  
left/right  
Menu select ---  
left/right  
Menu select ---  
left/right  
Menu select  
left/right  
EXIT/  
DVD CLEAR  
Exit  
---  
Exit  
---  
DVD clear ---  
EXIT  
CH yz  
PAGE +/–  
Channel  
Channel  
Channel  
up/down  
Channel  
up/down  
---  
Channel  
up/down  
Channel  
up/down  
up/down, up/down  
Page up/down  
VOL yz  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2  
CH RTN/  
DVD RTN  
Previous  
channel  
Previous  
channel  
Previous  
channel  
---  
DVD  
return  
---  
---  
---  
Live  
Live  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Live TV  
---  
RECALL  
On-screen ---  
display  
On-screen ---  
display  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
29  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
29  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Remote Control functional key chart (continued)  
Toshiba TV  
(TV)  
Cable  
Satellite  
VCR  
DVD/LD  
Receiver  
(AUDIO)  
CD  
(AUDIO)  
PVR  
(VCR)  
Key Label  
(CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT)  
MUTE  
Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2  
SLOW/  
DIR  
x
Slow FWD Slow FWD  
Slow FWD  
---  
------  
------  
------  
------  
------  
------  
------  
------  
---  
Slow REW  
SKIP/  
SEARCH  
x Skip FWD  
Skip REW  
Skip FWD  
Skip REW  
Skip FWD  
Skip REW  
------  
------  
REW  
Rewind  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
---  
---  
---  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
PAUSE/STEP Pause  
---  
PLAY  
FF  
Play  
---  
Fast FWD ---  
---  
Fast FWD Fast FWD ---  
Fast FWD Fast FWD  
TV/VCR  
---  
---  
---  
---  
TV/SAT  
---  
TV/VCR  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Reverse  
Replay  
Stop  
DISC/AM/FM ---  
Disc shift  
Stop  
---  
AM/FM  
---  
Disc shift  
Stop  
---  
STOP  
REC  
Stop  
---  
Stop  
REC Menu ---  
(Single Click)  
---  
Record  
(Double Click)  
---  
Record  
(Double Click)  
LIST  
LIST  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
FAV CH yz  
FAV channel ---  
up/down  
HOME  
HOME  
Split  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
SPLIT  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
---  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
---  
PIC MODE  
FAV SCAN  
FREEZE  
PIC MODE  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
FAV SCAN ---  
Freeze  
---  
---  
---  
---  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
Notes:  
• “---” = key does not send a signal.  
• “  
• “  
TV” = key will operate the TV.  
VCR” = key will operate the last active VCR or DVD. (“Last active VCR/DVD” is the mode that remains for a minimum of  
5 seconds or if a key is pressed in that mode.)  
*1 Backlight key is a toggle key and does not send an IR signal.  
*2 Volume will punch through to TV by default. When the volume is unlocked, all the devices will have their own volume if their ID has  
volume data. The AUD modes (receiver, CD) will have their own volume if volume lock is set on TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, or DVD  
mode. See “Using the volume lock feature” on page 32.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
30  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
30  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Programming the remote control to operate your other devices  
Device code setup  
1. Refer to the multi-brand remote control device code table  
on pages 33–34 to find the code for the brand of your  
device.  
Searching and sampling the code of  
a device (8500)  
If you do not know the device code for a particular device, you  
can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that  
device mode and sample the functions to find the code that  
operates the target device. The keys available to be sampled,  
provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,  
VOL y, CH y, and PLAY. Invalid keys will be ignored while  
in program mode.  
If more than one code is listed, try each one separately until  
you find one that works.  
2. Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device  
(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights  
up.  
3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the  
Channel Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for  
your brand of device. If a valid code is entered, the mode  
indicator will blink twice. If an invalid code is entered, the  
mode indicator will blink one long blink.  
To cycle through each available device code and sample its  
functions:  
1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.  
2. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 5 – 0 – 0. The  
remote control will enter program mode.  
4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to  
test the code.  
3. Point the remote control at the target device and press  
POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be  
sampled).  
If the device responds to the remote control:  
You have entered the correct code.  
If the device does not respond to the remote control:  
You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3  
and 4 using another code.  
Note: In addition to POWER, confirm that all necessary keys  
on the TV remote control operate your device. If some keys  
are not operational, repeat the device code setup using  
another code (if other codes are listed for your device). If,  
after trying all listed codes, the necessary keys do not operate  
your device, use the device’s original remote control.  
4. If the device responds to the remote control:  
Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode  
indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit  
the program mode.  
If the device does not respond to the remote control:  
Press y, and then press POWER. Repeat this step until  
the device responds to the remote control, and then press  
RECALL.  
Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode  
indicator will blink three times. The remote control will  
begin to cycle through the available codes again. If no key  
is pressed within 10 seconds while programming, the  
remote control will exit the program mode and return to the  
previous code.  
5. To control the TV, repeatedly press MODE to select “TV.”  
Note:  
• Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may  
not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you  
want to control. If you are unable to program the TV remote control to  
operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the  
device’s remote control or the controls on the device.  
POWER  
• Each time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the  
remote control.  
Numbers  
MODE  
• Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. These VCRs have a  
switch labeled “VCR1/VCR2.” If your VCR has this kind of switch and  
does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the switch to the  
other position (“VCR1” or “VCR2”) and reprogram the remote control.  
y
CH y  
VOL y  
RECALL  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
31  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
31  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Programming the remote control to operate your other devices (continued)  
Using the volume lock feature (8000) Operational feature reset (8900)  
For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the volume  
controls (VOL yz and MUTE) can be locked to the selected  
device mode. This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and  
AUDIO 2 modes.  
This feature clears all programmed features not related to “Device  
code set up” and resets the Volume Lock to “TV.”  
To reset the features:  
While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 –9 –0 – 0.  
The Mode indicator will blink two times, and then pause  
and blink two more times.  
To lock the volume controls to always control the  
CABLE/SAT device volume (for example):  
1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE/SAT mode.  
2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.  
3. Press VOL y.  
The CABLE/SAT mode light will blink two times (locked).  
To reset the volume controls to the original device mode:  
1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.  
2. Press VOL z.  
Numbers  
MODE  
The mode light will blink four times (unlocked).  
VOL yz  
RECALL  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
32  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
32  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Multi-brand remote control device codes  
VCRs/PVRs  
Brand  
VCRs/PVRs (cont.)  
Brand  
Cable boxes  
Brand  
Code  
Code  
Code  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
AKAI  
0135  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
0131, 0124, 0127,  
0123, 0126, 0120,  
0143  
0131, 0123, 0124,  
0173  
ABC  
1124  
0127, 0132, 0181  
0129, 0114, 0115,  
0116  
0139, 0111  
0105, 0113  
0120, 0126, 0180  
0123, 0125  
0143  
ARCHER  
CABLEVIEW  
CITIZEN  
CURTIS  
DIAMOND  
EAGLE  
EASTERN  
GCBRAND  
GEMINI  
1132, 1125  
1105, 1132  
1122, 1105  
1112, 1113  
1124, 1132, 1125  
1129  
AUDIO DYNAMIC  
BELL&HOWELL  
BROKSONIC  
CANON  
CCE  
CITIZEN  
CRAIG  
CURTIS MATHES  
DAEWOO  
PIONEER  
PROSCAN  
0123  
0145, 0100, 0123,  
0124, 0131, 0146,  
0101, 0102, 0133  
0121, 0122, 0123,  
0124  
0133, 0124, 0105,  
0136, 0109, 0140,  
0127  
0133, 0145, 0100,  
0123, 0124, 0131,  
0146, 0101, 0102,  
0170, 0172, 0174,  
0176, 0183  
1134  
1132, 1105  
1122, 1143  
1119, 1124, 1125,  
1126, 1127, 1120,  
1121, 1122, 1111,  
1123, 1152  
1140, 1141, 1142,  
1145, 1118, 1112  
1103, 1124  
1103, 1104, 1105,  
1108  
0106  
QUASAR  
0105, 0129, 0106  
0145, 0124, 0127  
0143, 0101, 0124,  
0175  
0139, 0110, 0111  
0145  
0143, 0126, 0119,  
0103, 0125, 0142,  
0120, 0118  
G.I./JERROLD  
RADIO SHACK  
DBX  
DIMENSIA  
EMERSON  
RCA  
HAMLIN  
HITACHI  
MACOM  
FISHER  
FUNAI  
0105, 0108, 0109,  
0107, 0113, 0165  
0127, 0126, 0120,  
0134  
0133, 0145, 0124  
0137, 0151, 0163,  
0149, 0150, 0182  
0106  
0170, 0171, 0168,  
0134, 0156  
0123, 0145, 0100,  
0127, 0168  
REALISTIC  
0124, 0105, 0136,  
0109, 0140, 0127  
7102  
0137, 0102, 0104,  
0133  
0163  
0139, 0126, 0120,  
0152  
0105, 0109, 0113  
0101, 0102, 0104,  
0109, 0138, 0140,  
0147, 0148, 0126  
0105, 0106, 0107,  
0108, 0100  
0135, 0136, 0167,  
0162  
0117  
0127, 0135  
0117  
0128, 0129, 0130,  
0153, 0154, 0155,  
7101  
0127  
0131, 0123, 0124,  
0127, 0178  
0127, 0168, 0177  
0106  
0139, 0110, 0111  
0139, 0110, 0127,  
0111  
MAGNAVOX  
MEMOREX  
MOVIETIME  
OAK  
1133  
1130  
Replay TV  
SAMSUNG  
1132, 1105  
1139, 1137, 1102  
1109, 1110, 1114,  
1151, 1153  
1128, 1129, 1130,  
1106, 1107, 1150,  
1131  
1101, 1116  
1105, 1132  
1132  
1115  
1132  
1112, 1118, 1140,  
1141, 1142, 1145,  
1149  
GE  
GO VIDEO  
PANASONIC  
SAMTRON  
SANSUI  
PHILIPS  
GOLDSTAR  
GRADIENTE  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
PIONEER  
PULSAR  
PUSER  
RCA  
REALISTIC  
REGAL  
HITACHI  
INSTANT REPLAY  
JENSEN  
JVC  
0124, 0123  
0139  
SEARS  
SHARP  
0139, 0110, 0111,  
0134, 0157, 0158,  
0184, 0185, 7104  
0139, 0110, 0106,  
0111  
SHINTOM  
SIGNATURE 2000  
SINGER  
KENWOOD  
REGENCY  
REMBRANT  
1134  
1137, 1132, 1105,  
1138  
LG  
LXI  
0159  
SONY  
0127, 0106, 0100,  
0107, 0108, 0105,  
0109  
0131, 0123, 0124,  
0173  
0139, 0110, 0111  
0106  
0124, 0109  
0138, 0140, 0147,  
0148, 0141, 0142  
0100, 0145  
0138, 0140, 0147,  
0148, 0141, 0142,  
0161, 0164  
0147, 0127, 0104  
0139, 0110, 0111,  
0134  
SAMSUNG  
S.A.  
SLMARK  
SPRUCER  
STARGATE  
TELECAPTION  
TELEVIEW  
TEXSCAN  
TOCOM  
TOSHIBA  
UNIKA  
UNIVERSAL  
VIDEOWAY  
VIEWSTAR  
ZENITH  
1105  
1111, 1112, 1113  
1105, 1101  
1105, 1110  
1132, 1105  
1148  
SV2000  
SYLVANIA  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MARTA  
MEMOREX  
MGA  
SYMPHONIC  
TASHIRO  
TATUNG  
TEAC  
1101, 1105  
1144  
1135, 1136, 1147  
1104, 1146  
1132, 1125  
1122, 1132  
1106  
1129, 1130  
1117, 1100  
1100  
MINOLTA  
MITSUBISHI  
TECHNICS  
0121, 0122, 0123,  
0124  
0124, 0127, 0112  
0179, 0183  
7100, 7101  
0101, 0146, 0166,  
0160  
TEKNICA  
THOMSON  
Tivo  
MULTITECH  
NEC  
TOSHIBA  
ZENITH/DRAKE  
SATELLITE  
OLYMPIC  
OPTIMUS  
0124, 0123  
0128, 0121, 0135,  
0106  
0126, 0120, 0132  
0123, 0124, 0121,  
0122  
0124, 0100, 0145,  
0105, 0139, 0110,  
0111  
VECTOR RESEARCH 0111  
WARDS  
0135, 0136, 0109,  
0144, 0106  
0105, 0139, 0110,  
0111  
0144, 0106, 0169,  
0180  
ORION  
PANASONIC  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
PENNEY  
PENTAX  
0100, 0111, 0145  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
33  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
33  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Multi-brand remote control device codes (continued)  
Receivers (cont.)  
Brand  
DVD players  
Brand  
CD players  
Brand  
Code  
Code  
Code  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
CARVER  
DENON  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
GARRARD  
HARMAN/KARDON 6120, 6121, 6123,  
6119  
6126  
6133, 6135  
6129  
6142, 6151  
6139  
6105, 6106  
6117  
PIONEER  
QUASAR  
RCA  
4105, 4107, 4150  
4119, 4118, 4121  
4103, 4105, 4127,  
4131, 4130, 4149  
4103, 4111, 4139  
4134, 4137  
4122  
4138  
4112, 4113, 4111,  
4110  
4121, 4118, 4119  
4132, 4133  
AIWA  
APEX  
DENON  
FERGUSON  
HITACHI  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
KONKA  
MITSUBISHI  
NORDMENDE  
ONKYO  
ORITRON  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
RAITE  
3123  
3120  
3100, 3117  
3101  
3111  
3109  
3115, 3129  
3119  
3105  
3101  
3121  
3124  
3100  
3103, 3116  
3102  
SANSUI  
SHARP  
SONY  
SOUNDE-SIGH  
TEAC  
HITACHI  
JENSEN  
JVC  
6107  
6134  
6140, 6141, 6145,  
6148, 6151  
6100, 6101, 6111,  
6145  
TECHNICS  
VICTOR  
YAMAHA  
4101, 4102  
KENWOOD  
Laser disks  
Brand  
Code  
LXI  
6136  
3113  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MACINTOSH  
NAKAMICHI  
ONKYO  
6129, 6132  
6129  
6121  
RCA  
SABA  
SAMPO  
SAMSUNG  
SHARP  
SILVANIA  
SMC  
SONY  
3101, 3106  
3101  
3114  
3110  
3108  
3132, 3118  
3125  
3104, 3126, 3127,  
3128  
3100  
3101  
3103  
3122  
3100, 3130  
3107, 3112  
3131  
DENON  
HITACHI  
5114  
5100  
5102, 5103  
5101  
5114  
5114, 5118, 5119  
5114  
5104, 5105, 5106,  
5115  
5111  
5114  
5114  
5104, 5105, 5106,  
5115  
5114  
5112  
5114, 5117  
5113, 5116  
5107, 5108, 5109,  
5110  
5114  
5114  
KENWOOD  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MITSUBISHI  
NEC  
6110  
6114, 6115  
6108, 6118, 6120,  
6122  
6124, 6125, 6127,  
6150  
OPTIMUS  
PANASONIC  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
QUASAR  
RCA  
6129, 6130, 6149  
6108  
TECHNICS  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
WAVE  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
VIALTA  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
PROSCAN  
QUASAR  
6125, 6127, 6124  
6147, 6137, 6138,  
6131, 6152  
6110, 6146, 6113  
6105  
6110, 6146  
6142, 6143  
6120  
6128  
6144  
6112, 6116, 6118  
6127, 6124, 6125  
6140, 6141, 6145  
6102, 6103, 6104  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
SHARP  
SHERWOOD  
SONY  
SOUNDE-SIGH  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
VICTOR  
YAMAHA  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
SHARP  
SONY  
FUNAI  
3132, 3118  
Satellite receivers  
Brand  
DISH NETWORK  
(Echostar)  
ECHOSTAR  
EXPRESS VU  
G.E.  
Code  
2105, 2115, 2116,  
2117  
2105  
2105, 2115  
2106  
TEAC  
TOSHIBA  
YAMAHA  
5101  
G.I.(GENERAL  
INSTRUMENT)  
GRADIENTE  
HITACHI  
HNS(Hughes)  
MAGNAVOX  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
2108  
Receivers  
Brand  
Code  
2114  
2103, 2111, 2112  
2103  
2101, 2102  
2104  
2101, 2102, 2118  
2108  
2106, 2109, 2110,  
2113  
2106, 2109, 2110,  
2113  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
DENON  
4120  
4125, 4126, 4146  
4134, 4135, 4136,  
4143  
4104  
4113  
FISHER  
GARRARD  
HARMAN KARDON 4115, 4123, 4145  
JENSEN  
JVC  
PRIMESTAR  
PROSCAN  
4129  
4132, 4133, 4140,  
4144  
RCA  
SONY  
STAR CHOICE  
TOSHIBA  
2107  
KENWOOD  
4100, 4108, 4141,  
4142, 4147  
4127, 4128  
4124  
4116  
4148  
4106, 4117  
4109, 4114  
4103, 4127, 4131,  
4130  
2103, 2108  
2100, 2103, 2119,  
2120, 2121, 2122,  
2123, 2124, 2125  
2101, 2102  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MCNTOSH  
MITSUBISHI  
NAKAMICHI  
ONKYO  
UNIDEN  
OPTIMUS  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
4119, 4118, 4121  
4123  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
34  
HM95_R1_026-34_061505  
34  
6/24/05, 9:27 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Menu layout and navigation  
4
The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV’s menu system.  
Main menu layout  
To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV front panel.  
TV Guide On Screen® Launch Gemstar / TV GUIDE  
Audio Player Launch MP3 audio player  
Applications Picture Viewer Launch the Picture Viewer  
Digital CC / Audio Selector Launch the ATSC Digital CC Selector  
CableCARD™ Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD™  
(this option is not available if CableCARD™ is not inserted)  
Picture Settings [ Picture Settings Edit Window ]  
Video  
Advanced Picture Settings [ Advanced Picture Settings Edit Window ]  
Theater Settings [ Theater Settings Edit Window ]  
Audio Settings [ Audio Settings Window ]  
Audio  
Advanced Audio Settings [ Advanced Audio Settings Window ]  
Audio Setup [ Audio Setup Window ]  
Favorite Channels [ Favorite Channels Edit Window ]  
Closed Caption Mode Off / CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4  
Closed Caption Advanced [ Advanced Closed Captions Window ]  
Input Labeling [ Input Labeling Edit Window ]  
Preferences  
Menu Language English / Français / Español  
Home CH Setup [ Home channel Setup Window ]  
Enable Rating Blocking Off / On  
Locks  
Edit Rating Limits [ Edit Rating Limits Edit Window ]  
Channels Block [ Channels Block Edit Window ]  
Input Lock Off / Video / Video+  
Front Panel Lock Off / On  
GameTimer™ Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min  
New PIN Code [ New PIN Code Entry Window ]  
Installation [ Installation sub menu is launched (see page 36 for details) ]  
Sleep Timer [ Sleep Timer Edit Window ]  
On/Off Timer [ On/Off Timer window ]  
HDMI 1 Audio Auto / Digital / Analog  
HDMI 2 Audio Auto / Digital / Analog  
Slide Show Interval 2 sec. / 5 sec. / 10 sec. / 15 sec. / 20 sec.  
AVHD Skip Time 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 15 min.  
Gray Level 1 / 2 / 3  
Setup  
Quick Restart Off / On  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
35  
HM95_R1_035-36_061505  
35  
6/24/05, 9:34 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation  
Setup / Installation menu layout (continued)  
To open the Installation menu (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV front panel, open the Setup menu,  
select Installation, and press ENTER.  
From Main Menu/Setup  
menu, select “Installation”  
sub-menu  
Input Configuration [ Input Configuration Window ]  
Terrestrial  
Devices  
Channel Program ANT1  
[ Scan for new channels on desired Antenna ]  
}
ANT2  
Channel Add/Delete [ Channel Add / Delete Window ]  
Signal Meter [ Signal Meter Window ]  
IEEE1394 Devices [ IEEE1394 Device Management Window ]  
TheaterNet Devices [ TheaterNet Setup Window ]  
TV Guide On Screen® Setup Start [ Launches TV Guide On Screen® system setup]  
Time and Date Start Setup [ Time And Date Setup Window ]  
System Status System Information [ System Information Window ]  
Navigating the menu system  
You can use the buttons on the remote  
control or TV front touchpad to access and  
navigate your TV’s on-screen menu system.  
TV front touchpad  
Remote control  
• Press MENU to open the menu  
system.  
• Use the up/down/left/right arrow  
buttons (yzx •) on the remote  
control or TV front panel to move in  
the corresponding direction in a menu.  
EXIT  
MENU  
(ENTER*)  
x
z
y
MENU  
*The MENU button on the TV front touchpad functions  
as the ENTER button when a menu is on-screen.  
• Press ENTER to save your menu  
settings or select a highlighted item. (A  
highlighted menu item appears in a  
different color in the menu.)  
• All menus close automatically if you do not make a selection within 60 seconds, except the  
signal meter menu which closes automatically after 5 minutes.  
ENTER  
y
x
z
To close a menu instantly, press EXIT.  
EXIT  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
36  
HM95_R1_035-36_061505  
36  
6/24/05, 9:35 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
TV Guide On Screen® setup  
5
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system  
The TV Guide On Screen® system in your TV is a no-fee  
Configuring the location of your TV  
Screen 1: Select the TV location (USA), and then press  
interactive program guide that uses the information you enter  
during the following setup process to provide you with a  
channel lineup and program listings for your area. The listings  
are automatically updated several times a day.  
ENTER.  
Note:  
You must first set up your TV according to the applicable  
connection instructions in Chapter 2.  
TM  
If you connected a Toshiba  
AVHD Recorder, you  
must perform the following TV Guide On Screen® system setup  
in order to use the Symbios full functionality. See pages 23 and  
50 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.  
To set up the TV Guide On Screen® system:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER.  
Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) for your location (use the  
Number buttons on the remote control for numbers and  
the yz buttons for letters), and then press ENTER.  
Screen 3 appears.  
Setup  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
3. A new set of Installation  
menu icons appears  
on-screen (see  
Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?  
If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 4 appears.  
If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears.  
TV Guide On Screen Setup  
Start  
illustration at right).  
Open the TV Guide  
On Screen® Setup  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
menu, highlight Start,  
and press ENTER.  
4. The following screen appears. Highlight Set up TV Guide  
On Screen® nowand press ENTER to continue.  
Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected?  
If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 5 appears.  
If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears.  
5. The following screen appears. Press ENTER to continue.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
37  
HM95_R1_037-40_061505  
37  
6/24/05, 9:35 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued)  
Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into?  
If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears.  
Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen® system to find the  
correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your Cable  
box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON, and  
then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.  
If you select Video 1, screen 7 appears.  
Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using  
Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen® system will test the code  
for the brand of Cable box you selected. Do not press any  
keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the  
testing process is completed. When testing is completed,  
screen 11 appears.  
your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.  
Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to  
connect your Cable box to the G-LINK® terminal on the  
TV. Make sure the G-LINK® cable is installed properly.  
For additional details, see page 25.  
Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after  
testing, select Yes and press ENTER. If you selected ANT 1  
in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you selected Video 1 in  
screen 5, screen 12 appears.  
Press ENTER to display screen 8.  
Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press  
ENTER to display screen 9.  
If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after  
testing and you want to test the same code again, select  
Test this code againand press ENTER.  
If you want to test a different code, select No and press  
ENTER. Screen 10 appears.  
Note: Many cable boxes require testing more than one code.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
38  
HM95_R1_037-40_061505  
38  
6/24/05, 9:36 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued)  
Screen 12: Do you have an antenna connected?  
Select either Yes or No, and then press ENTER. Screen 13  
appears.  
Screen 16: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to  
connect your VCR to the G-LINK® terminal on the TV.  
Make sure the G-LINK® cable is installed properly. For  
additional details, see page 25.  
Note: If you selected NO in screen 3, you must select YES in  
this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings.  
Press ENTER to display screen 17.  
Screen 17: Select your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.  
Screen 13: Are the settings correct?  
If you select Yes, screen 14 appears.  
If you select No, screen 1 appears.  
Screen 18 appears.  
Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, insert a tape (either blank or  
previously recorded), and then press PLAY. Screen 19  
appears.  
Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic  
TV Guide On Screen® system setup.  
Note: Read the on-screen information regarding the amount  
of time it may take for listing information to download from  
the TV Guide On Screen® service.  
Press ENTER to display screen 15.  
Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen® system will test the code  
for the brand of VCR you selected. Do not press any keys  
on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process  
is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.  
Screen 15: Is a VCR connected?  
If you select Yes, screen 16 appears.  
If you select No, screen 21 appears.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
39  
HM95_R1_037-40_061505  
39  
6/24/05, 9:36 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen® setup  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued)  
Screen 20: If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing,  
Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information on using  
select Yes and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.  
your TV Guide On Screen® system.  
Did your VCR stop playing?  
Press ENTER to exit the TV Guide On Screen® setup and  
watch TV.  
If your VCR did not stop playing the tape after testing and  
you want to test the same code again, select Test this code  
againand press ENTER.  
TV Guide On Screen® Reminder  
If you want to test a different code, select No and press  
ENTER. Screen 19 appears.  
Note: Many VCRs require testing more than one code.  
The TV Guide On Screen® system receives program listing  
data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In  
order to receive regular program listing updates, remember  
to do the following:  
Screen 21: Review the setup information displayed on your TV  
1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use by  
turning it OFF but leaving the power cord plugged in.  
screen (an example is shown below).  
2. If you have a Cable box connected, leave it ON.  
3. If you have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not  
in use. (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 13  
for VCR connection instructions.  
4. If you have more than one Cable system in your area,  
you may be prompted to select which Cable systems  
program data to download. If so prompted, follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
Note: If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period  
of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode  
(power cord plugged in and power OFF) to download the TV Guide  
On Screen® program schedule. It may take up to a week before an  
entire program schedule is available.  
If the information on your TV screen is correct for your  
setup, select Yes, end setupand press ENTER. Screen 22  
appears.  
If the information is incorrect, select No, repeat setup  
processand press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.  
Turning off the TV Guide On Screen®  
automatic display feature  
Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed  
TV Guide On Screen® system setup. Press ENTER to  
display screen 23.  
After you set up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the  
program guide will display automatically (default setting)  
when you turn on the TV. To turn off the automatic  
program guide:  
1. Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the  
TV Guide On Screen® system (if it is not already open).  
2. Use the x • buttons to select the Setup menu.  
3. Use the yz buttons to select Change Default  
Options,and then press ENTER.  
3. Use the yz buttons to select General Defaults,and  
then press ENTER.  
5. Set the Auto Guideoption to Off.  
6. Use the yz buttons to select Done, and then press  
ENTER.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
40  
HM95_R1_037-40_061505  
40  
6/24/05, 9:36 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
Setting up your TV  
6
For menu navigation instructions, see Chapter 4.  
Selecting the menu language  
Configuring the antenna input  
sources  
You can choose from three different languages (English, French  
and Spanish) for the on-screen display of menus and messages.  
(The TV Guide On Screen® menus are in English, regardless of  
the language selected in this menu.)  
To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in  
step 3 below.)  
To select the menu language:  
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.  
2. Highlight Menu Language and press .  
3. Highlight your preferred menu language in the menu  
sidebar and press ENTER.  
Setup  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
Preferences  
HDMI 2 Audio  
English  
Français  
Español  
Favorite Channels  
Closed Caption Mode  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Off  
Closed Caption Advanced  
Input Labeling  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Menu Language  
English  
Home CH Setup  
3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Input Configuration,  
and press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Note: The Terrestrial menu may not be accessible (items will  
be “grayed out”) in some instances (for example, if a cable  
box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the VIDEO  
modes is the current input during TV Guide On Screen®  
setup).  
4. Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu.  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
Channel Program  
Channel Add/Delete  
Signal Meter  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
4. Press x or to select the input source (Cable or Antenna)  
for the ANT 1 input on the TV.  
Note: If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during  
TV Guide On Screen® setup, the entire Terrestrial menu will  
not be accessible, including the input source for ANT 1, which  
will automatically display “Cable Box.”  
5. Press z and then x or to select the input source (Cable  
or antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if applicable. If  
you have not connected anything to ANT 2, skip this step.  
Input Configuration  
Antenna 1 In  
Cable  
Antenna 2 In  
Antenna  
Cancel  
Done  
6. To save your new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to your original settings, highlight  
Cancel and press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
41  
HM95_R1_041-43_061505  
41  
6/24/05, 9:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory  
When you press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or  
TV front panel, your TV will stop only on the channels stored  
in the TV’s channel memory.  
4. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Program,  
and press ENTER.  
5. Highlight ANT 1 or  
ANT 2, depending on  
which antenna input  
you want to program  
channels for, and then  
press ENTER to start  
automatic channel  
Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV’s  
channel memory.  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
Channel Program  
Channel Add/Delete  
Signal Meter  
Programming channels automatically  
Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area  
and store them in its memory. After the channels are  
programmed automatically, you can manually add or erase  
individual channels.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
programming.  
Select  
ANT 1  
Antenna  
Note:  
Scanning channels, please wait ...  
52%  
You must configure the antenna input sources before  
programming channels (see page 41).  
Abort  
• If the input signal type is set to CABLE for an antenna input, the  
automatic channel programming process erases channels that  
were previously programmed into the TV’s memory.  
The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels  
for the antenna input you selected, and store all active  
channels in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling  
through the channels, the message “Scanning channels,  
please wait” appears (as shown above).  
• If the input signal type is set to ANTENNA, the automatic  
channel programming process does NOT erase channels that  
were previously programmed into the TV’s memory, but adds  
newly found channels to the existing set of programmed  
channels. To remove a channel from the memory, you must  
manually delete it (see next page).  
6. To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or  
highlight Abort in the on-screen display and press ENTER.  
When channel programming is done, press CHANNEL  
y or z to view the programmed channels.  
To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel  
memory, you must use the Channel Number buttons on the  
remote control.  
• Programming channels for an antenna input configured for  
CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input  
configured for ANTENNA. This is normal; however, once  
channel programming is completed, you should not have to  
repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV  
service lineup changes significantly.  
Channel  
Numbers  
• If you have a CableCARD™ inserted (page 12), channel  
programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD™  
automatically loads the Cable channel list into the TV’s channel  
memory.  
To program channels automatically:  
1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.  
See page 41 for details.  
2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen).  
CHANNEL yz  
TV front touchpad  
Setup  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
CHANNEL z  
/
y
MENU  
(ENTER)  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
42  
HM95_R1_041-43_061505  
42  
6/24/05, 9:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory (continued)  
To add a channel to the channel memory:  
Manually adding and deleting channels in  
Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number  
you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box.  
the channel memory  
After automatically programming channels into the channel  
memory, you can manually add or delete individual channels.  
To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel:  
Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (–/100) on the  
remote control to enter the channel number (for example,  
56–1).  
To add or delete channels in the channel memory:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in  
step 3).  
If the channel is found, the number will be added to the list  
and the box will be checked.  
If the channel is not found, a message will appear.  
To remove a channel from the channel memory:  
Setup  
Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you  
want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the  
box.  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
To save your new settings:  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
To revert to your original settings:  
3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Add/Delete,  
and then press ENTER.  
Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving.  
To remove all channels from the channel memory:  
Highlight Reset and press ENTER, and then highlight  
Done and press ENTER.  
Note:  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
Channel Program  
Channel Add/Delete  
Signal Meter  
• This action applies to the current antenna input only. To  
delete/add channels on the other input, highlight the input  
you want (ANT1 or ANT 2) and press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
• This action cannot be cancelled unless you highlight Cancel  
and press ENTER before saving your changes.  
4. The illustration below left shows channels programmed for  
the ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels  
programmed for the Cable box or ANT 2 antenna input,  
press the y z buttons to highlight either “ANT 2” or  
“Cable Box” and press ENTER.  
Channel Add/Delete  
ANT 1  
ANT 1  
Analog  
Digital  
Digital  
Analog  
Analog  
Digital  
Analog  
Analog  
Digital  
Analog  
2
2 - 1  
2 - 2  
3
ANT 2  
Cable Box  
4
5
Note: “Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable  
box to your TV.  
6
7
Reset  
Cancel  
Done  
7 - 1  
8
Channel Add/Delete  
Channel Add/Delete  
ANT 1  
ANT 1  
ANT 2  
ANT 1  
Analog  
Digital  
Digital  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Digital  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
2
2 - 1  
2 - 2  
3
1
2
ANT 2  
ANT 2  
Cable Box  
3
Cable Box  
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Reset  
Cancel  
Done  
8
Reset  
Cancel  
Done  
7 - 1  
8
9
10  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
43  
HM95_R1_041-43_061505  
43  
6/24/05, 9:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Programming your favorite channels  
Edit Favorite Channels  
ANT 2  
You can program up to 27 channels as favorite channels into  
three Favorite Channel sets (nine channels from the ANT 1  
input, nine from the ANT 2 input, and nine from the Cable  
box input). You can then scan through your favorite channels  
only, skipping other channels you do not normally watch.  
To clear your favorite channel  
lists:  
1. Press MENU and open the  
Preferences menu.  
2
2 - 1  
2 - 2  
4 - 1  
5
17 - 1  
17 - 2  
28 - 1  
28 - 2  
28 - 3  
2. Highlight Favorite Channels  
and press ENTER.  
Reset  
To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets:  
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.  
2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER.  
3. Use the yz buttons to select either ANT 1, ANT 2, or  
Cable box and press ENTER.  
Cancel  
Done  
3. Highlight Edit and press  
ENTER.  
4. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
5. Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
4. Highlight Edit and press ENTER.  
To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:  
Press FAV CH yz.  
Favorite Channels  
ANT 1  
Preferences  
Favorite Channels  
ANT 1  
To tune your favorite channels using the  
favorite channel list:  
Closed Caption Mode  
Off  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
ANT 2  
Closed Caption Advanced  
Input Labeling  
Cable Box  
Empty  
Empty  
Menu Language  
Home CH Setup  
English  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CH 4-1  
CH 4-2  
CH 9  
1. Press 100 to display the favorite channel list.  
Edit  
Done  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
2. Press the corresponding number button (1-9)  
to select your desired channel.  
CH 10  
CH 12  
CH 17  
CH 19  
---  
To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set: Use the  
yzx • buttons to highlight an unchecked box next to a channel  
you want to set as a favorite, and then press ENTER to check the  
box.  
Note: To tune your favorite channels for another  
input, you will need to change the Input Selection  
first.  
---  
To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a nine  
picture multi-window (for the current ANT input):  
To delete the channel from the selected Favorite Channels set:  
Highlight a checked box and press  
ENTER to uncheck it.  
Edit Favorite Channels  
ANT 1  
Press FAV SCAN. See page 78 for details.  
2
3
4
Note: If you try to add more than  
nine favorite channels per input, an  
error message will appear. You will  
need to delete (uncheck) a channel  
before you can add another.  
Note:  
Only 9 favorite channels are allowed,  
please deselect other channels first.  
To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode, highlight a  
window and press ENTER.  
9
OK  
Reset  
10  
11  
Cancel  
Done  
To scan your favorite channels for another input, you will need to  
change the Input Selection first.  
When done, highlight Done and press ENTER.  
To program favorite channels for another input:  
Either... Highlight ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box, which  
will change the favorite channel settings in the selected  
input. (This will not change the TV’s current input.)  
Channel Numbers  
100  
Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box  
and then repeat steps 1–4.  
“Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable box  
to your TV.  
y
x
z
Favorite Channels  
ANT 2  
ANT 1  
CH 6  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
ANT 2  
Cable Box  
Empty  
Empty  
Edit  
Done  
FAV CH yz  
FAV SCAN  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
44  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
44  
6/24/05, 9:47 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control  
The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of  
IEEE1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices  
through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV’s  
remote control.  
5. The TheaterNet Setup menu opens.  
TheaterNet Setup  
Select device  
type, brand,  
and IR code  
from owners  
manual.  
Input  
Video 1  
Cable  
Type  
Brand  
IR List  
IR Code  
General Instrum...  
0000  
Note:  
0
0
0
0
Test  
• Although the TheaterNet on-screen device control feature includes  
codes for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of  
the features on certain devices you wish to control. If you are  
unable to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device  
or some of the features on that device, use the device’s remote  
control or the controls on the device.  
Reset  
Done  
Using the x • buttons, select the Input the device is  
connected to.  
Note: When the input is changed, all unsaved settings will be  
lost.  
• For IR pass-through device control information, see “Controlling  
infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR pass-  
through)” on page 21.  
6. Press z and then x • to select the device Type.  
7. Press z and then x • to select the device Brand.  
Note: When selecting a new brand, the IR code will be set to 0.  
8. Press z and then x • to select the device’s IR code.  
9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.  
Setting up TheaterNet  
All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup  
process before you can control them using the TheaterNet on-  
screen icons.  
If the desired IR code is not in the list, press z and use the  
Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code.  
Note: You can find the IR code for your device in the on-  
screen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on pages  
47–49.  
All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized  
by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup.  
Note: See page 22 for details about the IEEE1394 ports. If your  
IEEE1394 device is not recognized through the IEEE1394 port or  
through the TheaterNet feature, it may be possible to set it up for IR  
pass-through control as an infrared device (see page 21).  
10. Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device  
responds to the code. If the device does not respond to the  
code, repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code for the same  
device.  
To set up TheaterNet device control:  
1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared  
remote-controlled device(s). See page 21 for details.  
When done, highlight Done and press ENTER or choose a  
different Input for which to set up TheaterNet device  
control.  
2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in  
step 4).  
To remove a device from TheaterNet:  
1. Follow steps 1–5 above.  
2. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
Setup  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
4. Open the Devices menu, highlight TheaterNet Devices,  
and then press ENTER.  
Devices  
IEEE1394 Devices  
TheaterNet Devices  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
45  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
45  
6/24/05, 9:47 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control (continued)  
The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen  
control icons for various devices.  
Using the TheaterNet control icons  
1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if you have not  
already done so (see page 45).  
Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder control*  
Note: IEEE1394 devices do not need to be set up in  
TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the  
TheaterNet menu.  
2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device  
TM  
*If you connected a Toshiba  
AVHD Recorder, you  
control selection screen.  
must set up the TV Guide On Screen® system in order to use the  
Symbio’s full functionality. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up  
the TV Guide On Screen® system. See pages 23 and 50 for further  
details about AVHD digital recorders.  
TheaterNet  
0
Video 2  
Toshiba  
1
3
Video 3  
Toshiba  
DEVICE  
2
ColorStream HD1  
Toshiba  
ColorStream HD2  
Toshiba  
CTRL  
y
x
z
Toshiba  
ENTER  
EXIT  
3. Using the yzx • buttons, highlight the device you want  
Toshiba  
to control and press ENTER.  
TheaterNet  
CH  
0
Video 2  
Toshiba  
1
3
Video 3  
Toshiba  
2
ColorStream HD1  
Toshiba  
ColorStream HD2  
Toshiba  
4. The input automatically changes to the input for the  
selected device, and the device’s control icons display on-  
screen.  
Toshiba  
ColorStream HD1  
ENTER  
TOP MENU SELECT EXIT  
Highlight the icon for the function you want to control and  
press ENTER.  
To select the device’s control icons directly:  
Press CTRL.  
To close the on-screen control icons:  
Press EXIT.  
To view another source:  
Press DEVICE and select the input source you want to  
view.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
46  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
46  
6/24/05, 9:47 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
TheaterNetIR device codes  
Amplifiers  
Cable boxes (cont.)  
CD players (cont.)  
Brand  
Code  
0406  
0674  
0269  
0300  
0160  
0078  
0892  
0331  
0892  
0269  
0165  
0269  
Brand  
Code  
Brand  
Proton  
QED  
Code  
0157  
0157  
0029  
Aiwa  
Bose  
Carver  
Curtis Mathes  
Denon  
RadioShack  
Regal  
Rembrandt  
Runco  
0015  
0020, 0273, 0279  
0011  
Quasar  
RCA  
0000  
0144  
1062, 0032, 0053,  
0179, 0305, 0468,  
0764  
Samsung  
Scientific Atlanta  
GE  
0877, 0008, 0017,  
0477, 1877  
0015  
Harman/Kardon  
JVC  
Left Coast  
Linn  
Luxman  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
NEC  
Nakamichi  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Parasound  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
RCA  
Realistic  
Sansui  
Shure  
Sony  
Soundesign  
Technics  
Victor  
Realistic  
Rotel  
SAE  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Scott  
0179, 0180, 0420  
0157, 0420  
0157  
Signal  
Signature  
sony  
0011  
1006  
0003, 0015  
0015  
0157, 0305  
0179  
Starcom  
Stargate  
Starquest  
Supercable  
Tocom  
Torx  
Toshiba  
Tusa  
0305  
0305  
0861, 0037, 0180  
1067, 0180  
0157  
0892, 0321, 0269  
0264  
0015  
0276  
0012  
0003  
0000  
0015  
0007  
Sears  
Sharp  
0321  
Sherwood  
Sonic Frontiers  
Sony  
0395, 0300  
0308, 0521  
0246  
0892, 0269  
0013, 0300  
0892, 0269  
0300  
0490, 0000, 0100,  
0185, 0604, 1364  
0145  
United Artists  
Zenith  
Soundesign  
TDK  
0000, 0525, 0899  
1208  
0420  
Tascam  
Teac  
0174, 0180, 0393,  
0420  
CD players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
0395  
0321  
0264  
Code  
0157, 0124  
0420  
Technics  
Victor  
0029, 0303  
0072  
Burmester  
California Audio Labs  
Carver  
0689, 0220  
0078, 0211  
0308, 0521  
0331  
Wards  
Yamaha  
0157, 0053  
0888, 0036, 0187,  
1292  
0029, 0303  
0157, 0179, 0437  
1297  
Classic  
Yorx  
0461  
DKK  
DMX Electronics  
Denon  
0000  
0157  
0873, 0003  
0305  
Wards  
Yamaha  
0078, 0013, 0211  
0354, 0133  
Laser disk players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Carver  
Denon  
Disco Vision  
Funai  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
NAD  
Emerson  
Fisher  
GPX  
Code  
0203  
0064, 0194, 0323  
0059, 0172  
0023  
0174, 0179, 1325  
1296  
Cable boxes  
Brand  
ABC  
Code  
0003, 0008, 0014,  
0007, 0011, 0017  
0899  
Garrard  
0393, 0420  
0032, 0305  
0157, 0173  
0032  
Genexxa  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
0203  
0194  
0023  
Americast  
Bell & Howell  
Bell South  
Contec  
Director  
Everquest  
0014  
0899  
0019  
0476  
JVC  
KLH  
Kenwood  
0072, 1294  
1318, 1372, 1373  
0681, 0826, 0626,  
0028, 0037, 0190  
1317  
0194, 0217  
0064, 0194  
0059  
0015  
Koss  
0059  
Gemini  
General Instrument  
0015  
Krell  
LXI  
Linn  
MCS  
MTC  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
0157  
0305  
0157  
0029  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Quasar  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Sega  
0059  
0204  
0064, 0194  
0059, 0023  
0194  
0476, 0003, 0276,  
0011, 0810  
0144  
0009, 0020, 0273  
0011  
GoldStar  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
Hytex  
Jasco  
Jerrold  
0420  
0157, 0305  
0626, 0029, 0157,  
0180  
0204  
0203  
0323  
0023  
0007  
0015  
0476, 0003, 0276,  
0012, 0014, 0015,  
0011, 0810  
0000  
0476, 1106, 0276,  
0810  
Miro  
Mission  
NSM  
Nikko  
Onkyo  
Optimus  
0000  
0157  
0157  
0174  
Sony  
0193, 0201  
0204  
Technics  
Theta Digital  
Yamaha  
Memorex  
Motorola  
0194  
0217  
0868, 0101  
1063, 0000, 0032,  
0037, 0145, 0179,  
0305, 0420, 0437,  
0468  
0029, 0303  
0420  
0626, 0157  
1063, 1062, 0032,  
0305, 0468  
0157  
Oak  
Pace  
Panasonic  
Paragon  
Philips  
Pioneer  
0019, 0007  
0237  
0000, 0107  
0000  
Miscellaneous audio devices  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Fisher  
JVC  
Jerrold  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
Code  
0010, 0159, 0404  
0052  
Panasonic  
Parasound  
Philips  
0305, 0317  
0877, 0144, 0533,  
1877  
0073  
0520, 0459  
0460  
Pioneer  
Pulsar  
Quasar  
0000  
0000  
0010, 0159, 0576  
0459  
Polk Audio  
Starcom  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
47  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
47  
6/24/05, 9:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
TheaterNetIR device codes (continued)  
Video accessory (HDTV decoder)  
Receivers (cont.)  
VCRs  
Brand  
Panasonic  
Pioneer  
Princeton  
Samsung  
Sensory Science  
Sharp  
Code  
1120  
1010  
Brand  
Proscan  
Quasar  
RCA  
Code  
1254  
0039  
Brand  
Code  
0048, 0209  
0000  
0278  
0037, 0000  
0041  
Admiral  
Adventura  
Aiko  
Aiwa  
Akai  
America Action  
American High  
Asha  
Audiovox  
Beaumark  
Bell & Howell  
Broksonic  
0113, 0295  
1190  
1023, 1254, 0080,  
0531, 1390, 1609  
0181, 0195  
1295  
1126  
1010  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Sansui  
0278  
0035  
0240  
1089, 0189  
0801, 1251  
0186, 1286  
0491, 0502, 1653  
1058, 1258, 1158,  
0158, 0474, 1367,  
1558, 1658,1758  
0670  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Sherwood  
Sony  
0037, 0278  
0240  
Receivers  
Brand  
ADC  
Code  
0531  
1089, 1405, 0121,  
0158, 0189, 0405,  
1388, 1641  
1390  
0104  
0184, 0121, 0209,  
0002, 0479, 1479  
0072, 0278  
0037  
Aiwa  
Soundesign  
Stereophonics  
Sunfire  
Teac  
Technics  
CCE  
Calix  
1023  
1313  
0463  
Alco  
Anam  
Canon  
Carver  
Cineral  
Citizen  
Colt  
0035  
0081  
0278  
1609  
1257  
1120  
1189  
1390  
1229  
1370  
0531  
Apex Digital  
Arcam  
Audiotronic  
Audiovox  
Bose  
Cambridge Soundworks  
Capetronic  
Carver  
1308, 1309, 1518,  
0039, 0309  
1189  
0037, 0278, 1278  
0072  
0037, 0047, 0240,  
0072  
0060, 0035, 0162,  
0041, 0760, 1035  
0240  
0045, 0278, 1278  
0042  
Thorens  
Venturer  
Victor  
1390  
0074  
Craig  
Wards  
0014, 0080, 0158,  
0189  
0176, 0186, 1176  
0195  
Curtis Mathes  
1089, 1189, 0042,  
0189  
Yamaha  
Yorx  
Zenith  
Cybernex  
Daewoo  
Denon  
Dynatech  
Electrohome  
Electrophonic  
Emerex  
Casio  
0195  
0195  
1136  
0080  
0857  
Clarinette  
Compaq  
Curtis Mathes  
Daewoo  
Denon  
0000  
0037  
0037  
0032  
Satellite receivers  
Brand  
1250  
1104, 1160, 0004,  
1360  
0042, 1801  
0463  
0110, 0189, 0891  
1181  
Code  
0772  
0216  
Emerson  
0037, 0184, 0000,  
0121, 0043, 0209,  
0002, 0278, 0479,  
1278, 1479  
0047, 0104  
0035, 0033  
0000  
AlphaStar  
Chaparral  
Crossdigital  
DishPro  
Echostar  
Expressvu  
GE  
Fisher  
Garrard  
Harman/Kardon  
Hewlett Packard  
JBL  
1109  
1005, 0775  
1005, 0775  
0775  
Fisher  
Fuji  
Funai  
GE  
0110, 1306  
0074, 1374  
1390  
JVC  
KLH  
0566  
0775  
0060, 0035, 0240,  
0760, 0807, 1035,  
1060  
0000  
0432  
0037, 0038, 1237  
0000  
GOI  
Kenwood  
1313, 1027, 1570,  
1569, 0027, 0042,  
0186  
General Instrument  
HTS  
Hitachi  
Hughes Network Systems  
JVC  
Magnavox  
Memorex  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
Next Level  
Panasonic  
Paysat  
0869  
0775  
0819  
Garrard  
Go Video  
GoldStar  
Gradiente  
HI-Q  
Harley Davidson  
Harman/Kardon  
Harwood  
Headquarter  
Hitachi  
Hughes Network Systems  
JVC  
Jensen  
KEC  
KLH  
Keen  
Kenwood  
Kodak  
LXI  
Lloyd’s  
Logik  
MEI  
MGA  
MGN Technology  
MTC  
Koss  
LXI  
Lasonic  
Linn  
Lloyd’s  
MCS  
1366  
0181  
1798  
0189  
0195  
0039  
1142, 0749, 1749  
0775  
0724, 0722  
0724  
0047  
0000  
0081, 0038  
0072  
0749  
0869  
0869  
Magnavox  
1089, 1189, 0189,  
0195, 0391, 0531  
1089, 1189, 0039,  
0189  
0046  
0000, 0042, 0041  
0042  
0247, 0701  
0724  
1142, 0749, 0724,  
1076, 0722, 1749  
0392  
0392, 0566, 0855,  
0143  
Marantz  
Philips  
0067, 0041  
0041  
0037, 0278  
0072  
Modulaire  
Musicmagic  
Nakamichi  
Onkyo  
0195  
1089  
0097  
Proscan  
RCA  
0135, 0842, 1298  
1023, 0042, 0080,  
0181, 0186, 0531,  
0670, 0738, 0801  
1518, 0039, 0309,  
0367  
0693  
Optimus  
RadioShack  
SKY  
Samsung  
Sony  
Star Choice  
Toshiba  
0869  
0856  
1109  
0639  
0869  
0067, 0041, 0038  
0035, 0037  
0037  
Panasonic  
0000  
0072  
0035  
Penney  
Philips  
0195  
0749, 0790, 1052,  
1053, 1054, 1285,  
1286, 1287, 1289,  
1749  
1089, 1189, 1269,  
0189, 0391, 1120  
1023, 0014, 0080,  
0150, 0244, 0531,  
0630, 1384  
0189  
0240, 0043  
0240  
0240, 0000  
1278  
Pioneer  
Uniden  
Zenith  
0724, 0722  
0856, 1856  
Magnasonic  
Polk Audio  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
48  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
48  
6/24/05, 9:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
TheaterNetIR device codes (continued)  
VCRs (cont.)  
VCRs (cont.)  
DVD players (cont.)  
Brand  
Code  
0035, 0039, 0081,  
0000, 0149, 0563,  
1781  
Brand  
Scott  
`
Code  
Brand  
Hitachi  
Hiteker  
JBL  
Code  
0573, 0664  
0672  
Magnavox  
0184, 0045, 0121,  
0043  
0035, 0037, 0047,  
Sears  
0702  
Magnin  
Marantz  
Marta  
0240  
0035, 0081  
0037  
0000, 0042, 0104,  
0046, 1237  
JVC  
KLH  
Kenwood  
0558, 0623, 0867  
0717  
0490, 0534, 0682,  
Semp  
0045  
Matsushita  
Memorex  
0035, 0162, 0454  
0035, 0162, 0037,  
0048, 0039, 0047,  
0240, 0000, 0104,  
0209, 0046, 0454,  
0479, 1037, 1162,  
1237, 1262  
0042  
0067, 0043, 0807  
0035, 0048  
0000, 0072  
0104, 0067, 0041,  
0038  
Sharp  
0048, 0807, 0848  
0072  
0737  
0711, 0719, 0720,  
0721  
Shintom  
Shogun  
Singer  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
Konka  
0240  
0072  
Koss  
0651  
0798  
0503, 0675  
0782  
0614, 0616  
0035, 0032, 0000,  
0033, 0636, 1032,  
1232  
0035, 0081, 0000,  
0043, 1781  
0000  
Lasonic  
Magnavox  
Malata  
Marantz  
Microsoft  
Mintek  
Mitsubishi  
Nesa  
Next Base  
Norcent  
Onkyo  
Oritron  
Panasonic  
Minolta  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
Multitech  
NEC  
0539  
0522  
0717  
0521  
0717  
0826  
0872  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
TMK  
Tatung  
Teac  
Technics  
Teknika  
Thomas  
Tivo  
Toshiba  
Totevision  
Unitech  
Vector  
Vector Research  
Video Concepts  
Videomagic  
Videosonic  
Villain  
0240  
0041  
Nikko  
0037  
0240  
0035  
0000, 0041  
0035, 0162  
0035, 0037, 0000  
0000  
0618, 0636  
0045, 0043, 0845  
0037, 0240  
0240  
Noblex  
Olympus  
Optimus  
0503, 0627  
0651  
0490, 0632, 1362,  
1462, 1490  
0503, 0539, 0646,  
0854  
1062, 0162, 0037,  
0048, 0104, 0432,  
0454, 1048, 1162,  
1262  
0184, 0209, 0002,  
0479, 1479  
1062, 0035, 0162,  
0225, 0454, 0616,  
1035, 1162, 1262  
0035, 0037, 0240,  
0042, 0038, 1035,  
1237  
Philips  
Orion  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Princeton  
Proscan  
RCA  
0525, 0571, 0632  
0539  
0045  
0038  
0045  
0037  
0240  
0000  
Panasonic  
0674  
0522  
0522, 0571, 0717,  
0822  
Penney  
Rotel  
Rowa  
Sampo  
Samsung  
Sansui  
0623  
0823  
0698  
Wards  
0060, 0035, 0048,  
0047, 0081, 0240,  
0000, 0042, 0072,  
0149, 0760  
0209, 0072, 1278  
0035, 0000, 0072  
0038  
Pentax  
Philco  
Philips  
0042  
0035, 0209, 0479  
0035, 0081, 0618,  
1081, 1181  
0037  
0573, 0820  
0695  
White Westinghouse  
XR-1000  
Yamaha  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
0670  
0630  
0633  
0533  
Pilot  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Profitronic  
Proscan  
Protec  
0067  
0081  
0240  
Sherwood  
Shinsonic  
Sony  
Sylvania  
Technics  
Techwood  
Theta Digital  
Toshiba  
Tredex  
Zenith  
0039, 0000, 0209,  
0033, 0479, 1479  
0533, 0864, 1533  
0675, 0821  
0490  
0692  
0571  
0503, 0695, 1045  
0800  
0060, 0760, 1060  
0072  
Pulsar  
0039  
0046  
0046  
DVD players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Apex Digital  
Quarter  
Quartz  
Quasar  
Code  
0641  
0672, 0717, 0755,  
0794, 0796, 0797,  
0830, 0856, 1100  
0736  
0035, 0162, 0454,  
1035, 1162  
0060, 0240, 0042,  
0149, 0760, 0807,  
1035, 1060  
0000, 1037  
0037  
Urban Concepts  
XBox  
0503  
0522  
RCA  
Audiologic  
B & K  
0655, 0662  
0571  
RadioShack  
Radix  
Randex  
Blue Parade  
Broksonic  
DVD2000  
Daewoo  
Denon  
Emerson  
Enterprise  
Fisher  
GE  
GPX  
Go Video  
Gradiente  
Greenhill  
Harman/Kardon  
0695  
0521  
0784  
0037  
Realistic  
0035, 0037, 0048,  
0047, 0000, 0104,  
0046  
0490, 0634  
0591  
ReplayTV  
Runco  
STS  
Samsung  
Sanky  
0614, 0616  
0039  
0591  
0670  
0522, 0717  
0699, 0769  
0715  
0651  
0717  
0582, 0702  
0042  
0240, 0045  
0048, 0039  
0000, 0067, 0209,  
0041, 0479, 1479  
0047, 0240, 0104,  
0046  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
49  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
49  
6/24/05, 9:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Setting the AVHD device skip time  
Setting the time and date  
When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive)  
device—such as the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder—to  
one of the TV’s IEEE1394 ports, you can use the AVHD device  
skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will  
skip forward or backward when you press the SKIP buttons.  
Note: If you already set up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the  
time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step.  
To set the time and date:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in  
step 3 below.)  
Note:  
TM  
• This TV will work best with the Toshiba  
AVHD  
Recorder for recording high definition and standard definition  
material from either tuner and for controlling live TV (pause/rewind/  
etc.). When the Symbio AVHD Recorder is connected to the TV, the  
remote control keys (LIVE, STOP, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.) are  
automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV.  
3. Open the Time And Date menu, highlight Start Setup, and  
press ENTER.  
Time And Date  
Start Setup  
• When you connect an AVHD (or D-VHS) device, the TV Guide  
On Screen® system is automatically configured to allow recording. See  
page 23 for device connection information. See Chapters 5 and 7 for  
details about setting up and using the TV Guide On screen® system.  
To set the AVHD device skip time:  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
1. Press MENU and open  
the Setup menu.  
If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen® system,  
the following screen will appear. To set the time, highlight  
TV Guide On Screen® and press ENTER. The TV Guide  
On Screen® setup sequence will start, and the time and date  
will be set automatically.  
Setup  
2. Highlight AVHD Skip  
Installation  
1 min  
3 min  
5 min  
15 min  
Sleep Timer  
Time and press .  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Auto  
Auto  
3. Press y or z to select  
the AVHD skip time (1,  
3, 5, or 15 minutes) and  
press ENTER.  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Time And Date  
Your TV Guide On Screen system can provide accurate  
time and date information.  
It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen  
first and use it to obtain the time and date.  
Setting the HDMI™ audio mode  
Manual  
TV Guide On Screen  
Cancel  
If you have already set up the TV Guide On Screen®  
system, the time and date setting screen will appear and you  
will need to manually set the time and date.  
To set the HDMI audio mode:  
1. Press MENU and open  
the Setup menu.  
Setup  
Time And Date  
2. Highlight HDMI 1 (or  
Installation  
Auto  
Sleep Timer  
Digital  
Analog  
2) Audio and press .  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Date (MM/DD/YY)  
Time (HH:MM)  
0 6 / 3 0 / 0 5  
1 1 : 1 1 AM  
Auto  
Auto  
3. Press z or y to select  
the HDMI audio mode  
(Auto, Digital, or  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Analog) and press  
ENTER. (Auto is the  
Cancel  
Done  
recommended mode). See “Connecting an HDMI or a  
DVI device to the HDMI input” on page 19.  
Note:  
• If you highlight TV Guide On Screen® (above) to set the time  
and date through the TV Guide On Screen® system and a  
power outage occurs, the time and date will be updated  
automatically when the power is restored.  
• If you highlight Manual (above) to set the time and date  
manually and a power outage occurs, you will lose the time  
and date settings when the power is restored.  
• If you manually set the time and date and then perform  
TV Guide On Screen® setup, the manual time and date settings  
will be overridden by the TV Guide On Screen® settings.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
50  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
50  
6/24/05, 9:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Viewing the CableCARD™ menu  
Setting the Quick Restart Feature  
A CableCARDenables you to view encrypted digital channels.  
See page 12 for connection and subscription information.  
After the CableCARDis inserted, a CableCARDoption  
appears in the Applications menu, with informational screens  
provided by your digital CableCARDservice (see illustrations  
below).  
With the Quick Restart feature set to ON, the TV will stay in  
Low Power Shutdown mode for several minutes after the TV is  
turned off (see Notes below).  
If the TV is turned on from Low Power Shutdown mode, the  
full picture appears immediately.  
To set the Quick Restart feature:  
CableCard Connected -- Acquiring  
channel information.  
1. Press MENU, and then press x or until the Setup menu  
appears.  
CableCard services will only operate  
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.  
2. Press z or y to highlight Quick Restart, and then press .  
3. Press z or y to select either “On” or “Offand press  
To view the CableCARDmenu:  
ENTER to display the information.  
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.  
2. Highlight CableCARDand press .  
Setup  
3. Press z or y to select one of the side menu items and press  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Gray Level  
Off  
Auto  
Auto  
2 Sec  
15 min  
2
On  
ENTER to display the information.  
On  
Quick Restart  
Applications  
TV Guide On Screen  
Audio Player  
IP Service  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Conditional Access  
CableCARD(tm) Status  
Network Setup  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
CableCARD  
Note:  
CableCARD(tm) Pairing  
If Quick Restart is set to Off and you turn off the TV, it can take  
several seconds for the picture to appear when you turn on the TV  
again.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
If Quick Restart is set to On and you turn off the TV, the following  
will occur for a few minutes:  
Note: The CableCARDmenu is for informational purposes  
only and has no user-adjustable options.  
• The screen (lamp) lights dimly.  
• The fans continue to run.  
This is a function of the Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown mode  
and is not a TV malfunction. If you do not prefer this, set the Quick  
Restart feature to Off.  
When the Quick Restart feature is set to Off, if you repeatedly turn  
the TV on and off in a short period of time, the useful service life of  
the lamp may be shorter than the average useful service life. See  
page 103.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT  
HOT LAMP RESTART”  
When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit  
to get hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear  
on-screen in the following situations:  
When the Quick Restartfeature is set to OFF and you turn  
the TV off and then on again within a few minutes.  
If the TV is on when a short-term power failure, power surge,  
or other similar power failure occurs, such that the TV loses  
and regains power within a few minutes.  
This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology  
and is NOT a sign of malfunction.  
If this occurs, the green LED on the TV front panel will blink (and  
the red LED will be lit solid) until the TV is finished restarting the  
lamp and the normal picture appears. If BOTH green and red LEDs  
are blinking at a one-second rate, you will need to turn the TV off  
and then on again to restart the lamp.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
51  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
51  
6/24/05, 9:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Viewing the digital signal meter  
Viewing the system status  
You can view the digital signal meter for the ANT 1 and ANT 2  
digital TV input sources only.  
To view the system status:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
To view the digital signal meter:  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown  
below right).  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of  
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in  
step 3 below.)  
Setup  
Installation  
System Status  
System Infomation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Auto  
Auto  
Setup  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Select  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
3. Open the System Status menu, highlight System  
Information, and then press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
4. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to  
check the Product Information and Software Version.  
3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Signal Meter, and  
press ENTER.  
System Information  
System Information  
Product Information  
Software Version  
Brand:  
Model:  
Toshiba  
52HM95  
0.3.0  
Mar 9 2005 - 12:37:10  
FW:0.12  
IEEE1394 GUID:  
00003914-28343803  
Terrestrial  
Sub:47  
Input Configuration  
Channel program  
Channel Add/Delete  
Signal Meter  
O K  
O K  
To close the screen and return to the Installation menu:  
Highlight OK and press ENTER.  
To return to normal viewing:  
Press EXIT.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
4. Use the yzx • buttons to select the antenna input and  
digital channel whose signal you want to check.  
Restore Factory Defaults  
Note: The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal  
Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel  
number. Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF  
channel numbers for your local digital stations.  
To restore all settings and channels to their factory default  
values:  
1. Follow steps 1–3 above.  
Signal Meter  
Signal Locked  
2. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to  
0
Peak  
0
select Factory Defaults.  
Antenna  
1
3. Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set).  
Physical Digital Channel  
Virtual Digital Channel  
13  
N/A  
4. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. The TV will turn off  
automatically after a few seconds. After the TV turns off,  
unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to  
complete the restore process.  
O K  
To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu:  
Highlight OK and press ENTER.  
To cancel the reset:  
To return to normal viewing:  
Highlight No and press ENTER.  
Press EXIT.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
52  
HM95_R1_044-52_061505  
52  
6/24/05, 9:48 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Black  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
®
Using the TV Guide On Screen  
interactive program guide  
7
The TV Guide On Screen® system is a free, interactive,  
on-screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists  
schedules and information for TV programs in your area.  
Direct tuning—Directly tune the TV to a current program  
you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide.  
RemindersSchedule show reminders that will either display  
an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV  
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.  
Note: Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide  
On Screen® data is required for the TV Guide On Screen® system to  
operate. The TV Guide On Screen® system does not work with satellite  
programming. Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen® data;  
rather, such data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for its  
accuracy and availability. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may  
exist between the TV Guide On Screen® system contained in your TV and  
the data provided by the third party. If you experience any performance  
issues with your TV Guide On Screen® system, please contact Toshiba  
Consumer Solutions by calling (800) 631-3811 or by visiting  
Recording—Easily schedule recording of one or more  
programs.  
Note: A VCR or IEEE1394 recording device is required for recording.  
It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the  
instructions in Chapter 2.  
Search—Search for shows by category, keyword, or  
alphabetically.  
On-screen help—The TV Guide On Screen® system contains  
on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions.  
http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.  
The TV Guide On Screen® system includes the following  
features:  
To open the TV Guide On Screen® system:  
• While watching TV, press  
Streamlined on-screen assisted setup—Quickly and easily set  
up your TV Guide On Screen® system using the on-screen  
prompts (see “Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system”  
below).  
the TV GUIDE button  
Applications  
on the remote control;  
TV Guide On Screen  
Audio Player  
—or—  
Program listings and INFO windows—Scroll through eight  
days of TV listings and view program information such as  
rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.  
Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen® information  
simultaneously.  
Channel lineup customization—Customize your channel  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
• Press MENU, open the  
CableCARD  
Applications menu,  
highlight TV Guide  
On Screen®, and press  
ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Note: After setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system, the program  
guide opens automatically by default when you turn on the TV. To turn  
off this feature, see page 40.  
lineup so your favorite stations are listed first.  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen® system  
Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen®  
system so it can receive current program data for your area.  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the  
Installation menus. (A new set of menu icons will appear  
on-screen, as shown in step 4 below.)  
Note: If you move the TV to a different ZIP/postal code, you will  
need to perform the TV Guide On Screen® Setup process to  
reconfigure your TV Guide On Screen® system.  
3. Open the TV Guide On Screen® Setup menu, highlight  
Start, and then press ENTER.  
If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box,  
and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection  
instructions.  
Note: You must connect a VCR or an IEEE1394 compatible  
recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen® systems  
one-touch recording feature. It is recommended that you  
connect your devices according to the connection instructions  
in Chapter 2.  
Setup  
Installation  
TV Guide On Screen Setup  
Start  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Auto  
Auto  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of  
television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is  
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and  
other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.  
4. Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup.  
Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen® interactive program guide.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
53  
HM95_R2_053-56_062705  
53  
6/27/05, 6:55 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system  
• While watching TV, press  
the TV GUIDE button  
to enter the TV Guide  
On Screen® system. The  
LISTINGS screen will  
appear with the current show  
highlighted.  
• When in the TV Guide  
On Screen® system, if you press  
the TV GUIDE button from  
any screen, the TV will tune to  
the show displayed in the Video  
Window.  
• Use the arrow keys on the  
remote control (yzx •) to  
highlight any show, and then  
press ENTER to tune to that  
show.  
• Scroll left or right (x •)  
to view eight days of listings.  
• Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently  
highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders.  
To access another Service screen:  
1. Press y to highlight the Service Bar.  
2. Press x or to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,  
Note:  
The TV Guide On Screen® menus shown in this manual are for  
illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and  
TV Guide On Screen® information as illustrated may not be  
available in your area. The options and features as illustrated  
are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the  
TV Guide On Screen® service to your TV.  
SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).  
3. Press z to use that Service.  
The TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide supports  
cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services, as well as  
over-the-air broadcasts. It does not provide listings for satellite  
services.  
Note: Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box.  
TV Guide On Screen® remote control functions  
BUTTON  
FUNCTION  
Numbers  
TV GUIDE  
• When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen® system and highlights the current show  
listing.  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen® system, returns to watching TV and displays the show in  
the Video Window.  
– (digital  
Numbers  
• For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing.  
• For entering digital channel numbers.  
separator)  
– (digital separator)  
MENU  
MENU  
INFO  
• Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind,  
keyword).  
TV GUIDE  
INFO  
• Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Service screen or other type of screen.  
• Makes a selection or executes an action.  
• With a currently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show  
channel.  
ENTER  
y
ENTER  
x
z
• With a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu with viewing options.  
PAGE UP/  
DOWN  
yzx •  
• Provide directional control.  
• When watching TV, y and z provide surfing through channels turned ON in the LISTINGS  
screen.  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen® system, moves from one set of screen information to the  
next, when applicable.  
|
|
PAGE UP/DOWN  
SS and TT  
REC  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen® system or watching TV, initiates the recording process.  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen® system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video  
Window.  
REC  
SPLIT  
SPLIT  
|
|
SS and TT  
• Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
54  
HM95_R2_053-56_062705  
54  
6/27/05, 6:55 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued)  
Video Window  
• When you open the  
TV Guide On Screen®  
system, the current  
program appears in the  
Video Window.  
• As you scroll through  
the listings, the Video  
Window will change  
to display the selected  
program.  
Info Box  
• The lock/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.  
You can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to  
change channels (unlocked) as you navigate through listings.  
To lock/unlock the Video Window:  
Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking  
and unlocking the Video Window.  
—or—  
Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press  
MENU to display the option to lock/unlock the Video Window.  
Panel Menus  
• A panel menu appears:  
– when you press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options  
are available); or  
– when you press ENTER on a show starting in the future.  
• When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to  
indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.  
• Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu.  
• Press y and z to move among the options.  
• Press x and to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on a  
odometer, to change the odometer choice.  
To move the highlight to the default command button, press ENTER  
from an odometer or entry box.  
To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the  
command button and press ENTER.  
To cancel any changes and close the panel menu:  
– press MENU; or  
– highlight Cancel and press ENTER.  
• If a panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one  
panel, the word “more” appears at the bottom of the menu. To access  
the additional options, either scroll down using the z button or the  
PAGE UP/DOWN (CH yz) button.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
55  
HM95_R2_053-56_062705  
55  
6/27/05, 6:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen® system (continued)  
Info Box  
Info Action Bar  
• An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or  
provides general help (for example, for a panel menu).  
• An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three  
sizes: Small, Large, or “No.”  
– Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes.  
– The default Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the  
SETUP Service screen (see page 66).  
Small Info Box  
• The Info Button icon (  
) appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info  
Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press the  
INFO key on the remote control to change the size and/or to display  
additional Info screens.  
• In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page  
forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel  
Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text).  
Large Info Box  
TV Guide On Screen® Icons  
ICON  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
Info Button  
• Additional Info Box information is available, or the Info Box has additional sizes.  
Progress Bar • Elapsed time in current show.  
• Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.  
HDTV  
New  
• Show is presented in high-definition TV, if available.  
• Show is new (not a repeat).  
• Show is available in stereo.  
Stereo  
Dolby Digital • Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).  
CC  
• Closed captioning is available for the show.  
• TV rating for the show.  
TV Rating  
Record Once • Show is set to Record Once.  
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),  
Regularly, and Weekly.  
Record Off  
• Show is set to Record but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).  
• Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
• Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.  
Record  
Suspended  
Remind Once • Show is set to Remind Once.  
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only),  
Regularly, and Weekly.  
Remind Off  
• Show is set to Remind but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).  
Remind  
Suspended  
• Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
• Remind resumes when the conflict no longer exists.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
56  
HM95_R2_053-56_062705  
56  
6/27/05, 6:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services  
The TV Guide On Screen® system consists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUP.  
Note:  
• For the RECORDINGS service to display, an IEEE1394 recording device must be connected to the television (see Chapter 2); otherwise, only  
four services display. Recording to other devices, such as a VCR, are possible from within the LISTINGS service.  
• When using the TV Guide On Screen® system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to  
make sure your system is set up properly.  
• If the power is cut or the plug becomes disconnected during timer recording, any recorded contents will be lost.  
• If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode (power cord  
plugged in and power OFF) to download the entire TV Guide On Screen® program schedule. It may take up to a week before an entire  
program schedule is available. Be sure to follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen® Reminder” on page 40.  
LISTINGS screen  
• When you open the TV Guide On Screen® system,  
LISTINGS is always the first service displayed.  
• Use the Number keys on the remote control to jump to a  
specific channel’s listings.  
To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press  
ENTER.  
To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular  
show, highlight a show and press MENU.  
• With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO  
to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.  
Episode Options panel menu  
From the Episode Options panel menu, you can choose to set a  
recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following  
are descriptions of the buttons.  
• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS  
to do the following:  
– View eight days of show listings  
– Read show descriptions  
GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide  
On Screen® system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted  
show (if the show airs in the future) or tunes to the show (if the  
show is currently airing). The button label changes according to  
whether the show is currently airing or not.  
SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu,  
from which you can set the show to record. For additional  
information, see “SCHEDULE screen” and “Record features”  
on page 61.  
SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu,  
from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional  
information, see “SCHEDULE screen” on page 61 and  
“Remind features” on page 63.  
Tune directly to a show currently airing  
– Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequency, automatic  
power ON, auto-tune TV)  
– Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency)  
– Lock and unlock the Video Window  
CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no information, and  
returns to the highlighted show.  
– Access panel ads and channel ads  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
57  
HM95_R2_057-62_062705  
57  
6/27/05, 6:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
SEARCH screen  
• SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword,  
alphabetically, or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports,  
Children, Educational, News, Variety, Series).  
Example: Category search  
1. From the SEARCH screen, press z to highlight a category  
(in this example, MOVIES).  
• With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to  
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.  
2. Press z to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL).  
• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH.  
3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by  
date and time.  
4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now)  
or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel  
menu. (See “Episode Options panel menu” on page 57.)  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
58  
HM95_R2_057-62_062705  
58  
6/27/05, 6:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
SEARCH screenrf  
Example: Keyword search  
6. A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed.  
Keyword search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular  
show by category or for every show title that matches.  
1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and  
then press ENTER.  
2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then  
press ENTER.  
7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.  
Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch  
(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options  
panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can  
choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the  
channel (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 57.)  
3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight  
CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a  
category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).  
4. After highlighting a category, press z to highlight ENTER  
KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.  
The TV Guide On Screen® system stores all the keywords you  
create.  
To edit or delete a keyword:  
From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the  
keyword you want to edit or delete, and then press MENU  
to display the Search Options panel menu, with the  
following options:  
5. The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight  
a character and then press ENTER to display it. When  
finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press  
ENTER.  
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
– EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you  
can change the keyword.  
– DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel  
menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the  
panel menu.  
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the highlighted show.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
59  
HM95_R2_057-62_062705  
59  
6/27/05, 6:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When using the TV Guide On Screen® system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording  
ke sure your system is set up properly.  
• If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode (power cord  
plugged in and power OFF) to download the entire TV Guide On Screen® program schedule. It may take up to a week before an entire  
program schedule is available. Be sure to follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen® Reminder” on page 40.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
RECORDINGS screen  
The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously  
recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE1394  
recording device connected to the TV (see Chapter 2).  
To view a recording, you can do one of the following:  
• Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The  
episode either starts from the beginning or from where it  
was last stopped (if viewed previously).  
Note: RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you  
have an IEEE1394 video recording device connected to one of the  
IEEE1394 ports on the TV. See Chapter 2 for details.  
• Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu, with the following options:  
For additional details, see “Record features” on page 61.  
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
• With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press  
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the  
screen.  
– RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it  
was last stopped (if viewed previously).  
– PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning,  
even if stopped previously.  
– DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the  
RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the  
IEEE1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu  
displays. Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close  
the panel menu.  
To choose the way recordings are displayed:  
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the highlighted show.  
1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar, and press  
MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu.  
2. Press yz to choose between View As and Sort By, as  
described below.  
View As: Press x • to choose between the following:  
List—Displays every recorded episode for a show (see  
example in Screen B, at right).  
Note: In List view, highlight an episode to display an Info  
Box with show information. Press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu (see “Episode Options  
panel menu” on page 57).  
Screen A  
Group—Displays recorded shows without listing every  
recorded episode (see example in Screen A, at right).  
Note: In Group view, highlight a show and press ENTER  
to view all recorded episodes. Press ENTER again to  
collapse the episode list.  
Screen B  
Sort By: Press x and to choose between the following:  
• Title—Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order (see  
example in Screen A, at right).  
• Date—Displays recorded shows by date and time, with  
most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and  
display the recordings with the selected options.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
60  
HM95_R2_057-62_062705  
60  
6/27/05, 6:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
est recording  
(power cord  
ore an entire  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
SCHEDULE screen  
The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or  
delete Record and Remind events you set previously.  
Record features  
You can set a show to Record, or edit the record settings for a  
show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are  
three ways to set a show to Record, as described below.  
1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the  
remote control  
Press the REC key on the remote control to record the  
show Once with current default settings (start and end  
recording on time). Each time you press REC, you change  
the Record frequency (but not the default settings) among  
Once (default), Regularly, Weekly, and Cancel.  
• With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press  
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close  
the screen.  
Note: The related Record icon appears on the show tile  
each time you press REC. See “Record icons,” on page 62.  
2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu  
1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu.  
2. Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to  
display the Record Options panel menu.  
• Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule  
Options panel menu, with the following options:  
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
– WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen® system  
and tunes to the highlighted show.  
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or to  
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.  
– DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from  
the schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES  
to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu.  
4. Highlight the START field, and press x or to choose  
in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late  
or On Time (default = On Time).  
– EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can  
change existing recording information.  
5. Repeat step 4 for the END field.  
– SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a  
reminder for the show (Record is not cancelled).  
6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press x or to  
choose the recording device.  
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.  
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the highlighted show.  
7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press x or to  
choose how long you want to keep the Record event.  
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.  
An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see “Record  
features,”at right, and “Remind features” on page 63.  
8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu.  
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the  
show tile. See “Record icons” on page 62.  
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
Note: You can change the default values of the Record Options  
panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on page 66.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
61  
HM95_R2_057-62_062705  
61  
6/27/05, 6:57 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
Record features (continued)  
3) Manually set a show to Record  
Record conflict  
1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press  
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.  
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:  
• A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another  
show previously set to Record.  
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press  
ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu.  
• A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to  
auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see “Remind features” on  
page 63.)  
Press yzx • to move through the options.  
Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the  
information, as necessary.  
Select one of these options:  
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will  
need to set the start and end time for the recording. For  
details, see “Set a show to Record from a panel menu” on  
the previous page.  
• Record Anyway—This show will override an existing show  
set to Record or auto-tune.  
• Don’t Record This Show—Cancels the Recording.  
Note: When setting a Manual Recording, the frequency  
option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Record  
icons,” below right, for a description of Record icons.  
4. When finished entering the information in the fields,  
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu.  
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the  
show tile. See “Record Icons,” below right.  
Note: Manual recording is listed by channel number.  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
Record icons  
Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear  
on the tile for a show set to Record.  
When using the TV Guide On Screen® system to record a  
program for the first time, it is recommended that you  
perform a test recording to make sure your system is set  
up properly.  
• Record Once  
—Records the show one time.  
• Record Regularly  
—Records the show every time the  
show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.  
Recording notification banner  
• If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.  
• Record Weekly —Records the show every time the show  
airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel,  
and starts at the same time.  
• If the TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to  
record, the recording occurs as scheduled.  
• If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than  
the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated  
below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time  
you can choose to start or cancel recording.  
• Record Daily  
—Records on the same channel and at the  
same start time every weekday (Monday through Friday).  
Note: This icon displays for manual recordings only.  
The default highlighted item in the notification banner is  
“Change channel; start recording.” If no change is made  
within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close  
automatically, the channel will change to the one set to  
record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If you want  
to cancel the recording, select “Don’t change; cancel  
recording” in the notification banner and press ENTER.  
• Record Suspend  
schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
—Recording is Suspended due to a  
• Record Off  
—Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list  
but will not record this show until the frequency is changed.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
62  
HM95_R2_057-62_062705  
62  
6/27/05, 6:57 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
Remind features  
You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions:  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
• Automatically turn on the TV (if off) at the scheduled  
reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show  
for which you set the reminder.  
2) Manually set a show Reminder  
• Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time,  
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.  
1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press  
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.  
• Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that  
the show is about to start), from which you can choose to  
tune the TV to the show’s channel or cancel the reminder.  
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press  
ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu.  
Press yzx • to move through the options.  
You can set a show reminder, or edit the reminder settings for a  
show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are  
two ways to set a show reminder, as described below.  
Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the  
information, as necessary.  
1) Set a show Reminder from a panel menu  
1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu.  
2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to  
display the Remind Options panel menu.  
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will  
need to set the start and end time for the reminder. For  
details, see “Set a show reminder from a panel menu,”  
at left.  
Note: When setting a Manual Reminder, the frequency  
option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Remind  
icons,” on the following page, for a description of Reminder  
icons.  
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or to  
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.  
4. When finished entering the information in the fields,  
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu.  
4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press x or •  
to choose either Yes (to turn on the TV automatically, if  
off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (default).  
A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the  
show tile. See “Remind icons” on the following page.  
Note: Manual reminders are listed by channel number.  
5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press x or •  
to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the  
channel you are setting the Reminder for at the  
scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the  
time) or No (default).  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
Note: You can change the default values of the Remind  
Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on  
page 66 for details.  
6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying  
the reminder screen), and press x or to choose in the  
range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On  
Time (default = 1 minute early).  
7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind  
icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile.  
See “Remind icons” on page 64.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
63  
HM95_R2_063-66_062705  
63  
6/27/05, 6:58 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
Remind features (continued)  
Reminder notification banner  
Based on your option settings, a notification banner will appear  
on-screen, if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time.  
Remind icons  
Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear  
on the tile for a show set to Remind.  
At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder  
banner, or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to  
the show.  
• Remind Once  
—Displays a show reminder one time.  
• Remind Regularly  
time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same  
time.  
—Displays a show reminder every  
If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner  
closes automatically and completes the highlighted item (default  
is HIDE REMINDERS).  
Note: If more than two reminders are set for the same time,  
arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner. Press yz  
to highlight the shows.  
• Remind Daily  
weekday (Monday through Friday) for the same channel and  
start time.  
—Displays a show Reminder every  
Note: This icon displays for manual reminders only.  
• Remind Suspend  
—Reminder is Suspended due to a  
schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
Remind conflict  
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:  
• Remind Off  
but will not display a reminder until you change the  
frequency.  
—Keeps the Reminder in the Schedule list  
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder has the same start  
time as an existing auto-tune Reminder.  
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a  
scheduled Recording.  
Select one of these options:  
• Auto-Tune Anyway—This show will override an existing  
show set to auto-tune.  
• Proceed, No Auto-Tune—Set the show as a Reminder but  
do not auto-tune.  
• Don’t Set This Reminder—Cancels the Reminder.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
64  
HM95_R2_063-66_062705  
64  
6/27/05, 6:58 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
SETUP screen  
After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen® setup (as  
described in Chapter 5), you can change the following settings:  
• Change system settings  
• Change channel display  
• Change default options  
Change channel display  
This option allows you to edit channel information that appears  
in LISTINGS, including the following:  
• Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS.  
• Change the “tune channel” number.  
Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
Note: The “tune channel” is the channel on which you receive  
a station. For example, two viewers in the same zip code may  
receive the same station on different channel numbers,  
depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a  
cable box.  
• Switch a channel to one of the following settings:  
On (channel is always displayed in LISTINGS)  
Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS)  
Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only  
when program information is available)  
With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to  
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL  
DISPLAY and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press  
ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu.  
Change system settings  
This option appears only after you have completed the initial TV  
Guide On Screen® setup process (as described in Chapter 5).  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM  
SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
3. To edit the options, press INFO and follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
2. Press ENTER again  
to display the  
Confirming Your  
Settings screen.  
3. Highlight one of the  
options, press  
ENTER, and follow  
the on-screen  
instructions.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
65  
HM95_R2_063-66_062705  
65  
6/27/05, 6:58 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen® interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen® Services (continued)  
SETUP screen (continued)  
Change default options  
This option allows you to change default settings in the  
following categories:  
Record defaults  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to  
display the Record Defaults panel menu.  
• General Defaults  
• Record Defaults  
• Remind Defaults  
General defaults  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS and press ENTER.  
3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields  
(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a  
Record event, the quality of the recording). See “Record  
features” on page 61 for details on entering values in these  
fields.  
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with  
no changes).  
2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to  
display the General defaults panel menu.  
Remind defaults  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to  
display the Remind Defaults panel menu.  
3. Enter the following information in the panel menu fields:  
• BOX SIZE: The initial Info Box size when you open the  
TV Guide On Screen® system. Choices are No, Small  
(default), Large, and Last Used.  
• BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when you press  
INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide  
On Screen® system is open. Choices are No Only, Small  
Only, Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small &  
Large, and All (default).  
3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields  
(power On TV, auto-tune, when to display the Remind  
screen). See “Remind features” on page 63 for details on  
entering values in these fields.  
• AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide  
On Screen® system when the TV is powered on. Choices  
are On (default) and Off.  
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with  
no changes).  
Note: Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the  
TV Guide On Screen® system to open every time you turn  
on the TV.  
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no  
changes).  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
66  
HM95_R2_063-66_062705  
66  
6/27/05, 6:58 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV’s features  
8
Selecting the video input source to view  
To select the video input source to view:  
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the  
TV front panel.  
2. Press 0–8 to select the input source you want to view, which  
will depend on the input terminals you used to connect  
your devices (see Chapter 2).  
Numbers  
INPUT  
The current signal source displays in the top right corner of  
the Input Selection screen.  
Input Selection  
ANT 1  
y
z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ANT 1  
Video 1  
Video 2  
Video 3  
ColorStream HD1  
ColorStream HD2  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
ANT 2  
0
8
INPUT  
to Select  
-
/
Note:  
• When the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the yz  
buttons on the remote control (or the Channel yz buttons on the  
front panel) to change the input, or you can repeatedly press  
INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel  
to change the input.  
Remote control  
TV/VIDEO  
To select an IEEE1394 input source, press the TheaterNet DEVICE  
button on the remote control (see page 26 and 45).  
• If an IEEE1394 device is the current input, it will appear at the  
bottom of the Input Selection list; however, it will not display in the  
list if you change the input source.  
CHANNEL zy  
TV front touchpad  
You can label the video input sources according to the specific  
devices you have connected to the TV (see “Labeling the video  
input sources” on the next page).  
*The MENU  
button  
functions as  
the ENTER  
button when  
a menu is  
on-screen.  
• The source can be “hidden.” See page 68 for details.  
(ENTER)*  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
67  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
67  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Labeling the video input sources  
You can label each video input source according to the type of  
device you connected to each source, from the following preset  
list of labels:  
4. Press x or to select the desired label for that input source.  
If a particular input is not used, you can select “Hide” as  
the label, which will cause that input to be “grayed out” in  
the input list and skipped over when you press the INPUT  
button on the remote control.  
– – (default label)  
Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection  
window)  
Note: If you select “Hide” for all of the input labels, the POP  
feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP  
feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen.  
Audio Receiver  
VCR  
Video Recorder  
Laser Disk  
Compact Disc  
DVD  
5. To save the new input labels, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory default labels, highlight  
Reset and press ENTER.  
Input labeling example:  
The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen  
(with none of the inputs labeled). The screen below right is an  
example of how you could label the inputs if you had connected  
a DVD player to VIDEO 1, Cable TV to VIDEO 2, an audio  
receiver to VIDEO 3, a video recorder to ColorStream HD1, a  
DTV set-top box to HDMI 1, and a satellite/DSS set-top box to  
HDMI 2. Also note that the ColorStream HD2 input is labeled  
“Hidden,” which means that the input will be skipped over  
when INPUT or TV/VIDEO is pressed.  
DTV  
Satellite/DSS  
Cable  
Game Console  
Note:  
• If you set up devices in TheaterNet,™ the associated inputs are  
automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove the  
device from TheaterNet (see page 45).  
• If you set up a cable box in VIDEO 1, that input will be labeled  
automatically and cannot be relabeled until you remove the device  
from the TV Guide On Screen® setup.  
You cannot select IEEE1394 devices through the Input Selection  
window; however, you can select and control IEEE1394 devices  
through TheaterNet (see page 45).  
Input Selection  
ANT 1  
Input Selection  
ANT 1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ANT 1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ANT 1  
DVD  
Video 1  
Cable  
Video 2  
Audio Receiver  
Video Recorder  
ColorStream HD2 (Hidden)  
DTV  
Video 3  
ColorStream HD1  
ColorStream HD2  
HDMI 1  
To label the video input sources:  
Satellite/DSS  
ANT 2  
HDMI 2  
ANT 2  
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.  
2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.  
0
8
INPUT to Select  
0
8
INPUT to Select  
-
/
-
/
Input Selection screen  
with no inputs labeled  
Input Selection screen with  
all inputs labeled except input 5,  
which has been hidden.  
3. Press y or z to highlight the video source you want to  
label.  
To clear the input labels:  
Preferences  
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.  
2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
Favorite Channels  
Closed Caption Mode  
Closed Caption Advanced  
Input Labeling  
Off  
Menu Language  
Home CH Setup  
English  
4. Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Note: If you set up a device in TheaterNet, its input label will  
not be cleared unless you remove the device from TheaterNet  
(see page 45).  
Input Labeling  
Video 1  
DVD  
Cable  
Video 2  
Video 3  
Audio Receiver  
Video Receiver  
Hide  
ColorStream HD 1  
ColorStream HD 2  
HDMI 1  
DTV  
HDMI 2  
Satellite/DSS  
--  
ANT 2  
Reset  
Done  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
68  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
68  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Tuning channels  
Using the channel browser  
The channel browser stores the most recently viewed channels (up to 32) in the channel history. This feature allows you to:  
• Keep a separate, temporary* history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs: ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box.  
*Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all three inputs.  
• Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels from the channel browser banner (illustrated below).  
• Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the channel browser banner) or Select mode (to surf  
over channels in the browser banner before you select one to tune).  
• Set a “HOME” channel for the ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs.  
To open the channel browser banner: Press x (  
)
or ( ) on the remote control.  
– Press x ( ) to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current  
input, which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box only).  
– Press ( ) to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history up to the most recently viewed channel.  
Elements of the channel browser banner  
Active channel  
status  
Highlighted channel  
Channels stored  
in the channel  
history  
Active channel  
Home channel instructions  
or (  
(Displays with a yellow  
background in Select mode.  
Displays with a yellow  
(In Browse mode, because the highlighted  
channel is tuned automatically, the active  
channel and the highlighted channel  
will always be the same.)  
[Press x (  
)
)
(Displays in this area  
only if available.)  
to surf the other channels  
in the channel history.]  
outline in Browse mode.)  
Hold HOME key  
3 sec to program  
12-3  
12345678  
14  
26-1  
QRS  
17-2  
TUV  
3
XYZ  
ABCD-DTV  
CB  
ANT 1 CABLE 3  
XYZ  
480p  
17-2  
Select Mode  
Current mode  
Current  
input  
Current  
antenna type  
(cable or TV)  
Active  
channel  
number  
Channel call  
letters  
(if available)  
Resolution  
Home channel  
(Select or Browse)  
To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode:  
After opening the channel browser banner, press y or z to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode. The “Current mode” field  
on the channel browser banner will flash green. Note: The channel browser banner opens in Browse mode by default.  
To tune to a channel in Browse mode:  
To tune to a channel in Select mode:  
1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or ( ) to open the  
channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel  
or forward to the next channel in the channel history.  
1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or ( ) to open the  
channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel  
or forward to the next channel in the channel history.  
In Browse mode, when you stop on a channel number in  
the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow  
outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel.  
In Select mode, when you stop on a channel number in  
the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow  
background but the TV will not automatically tune to the  
channel.  
2. Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner.  
2. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel.  
3. Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner.  
Hold HOME key  
3 sec to program  
3
2
102-1  
Ch.3  
Browse Mode  
ANT 1  
CABLE Ch.102-1  
1080i  
Hold HOME key  
3 sec to program  
3
2
102-1  
Ch.3  
Select Mode  
ANT 1  
CABLE Ch.102-1  
1080i  
In Browse mode, the highlighted channel number is outlined  
in yellow and the channel will be tuned to automatically.  
In Select mode, the highlighted channel number has a  
yellow background. Press ENTER to tune to the channel.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
69  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
69  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Tuning channels (continued)  
Using the channel browser (continued)  
Adding and clearing channels in the  
channel history  
Setting a channel as the “Home” channel  
for an input  
To set a channel as Home using the remote control:  
Adding channels to the channel history  
1. Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the  
Home channel for the current antenna input.  
The channel browser automatically creates a history of the  
last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input (ANT 1,  
ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). A separate history will be  
stored for each of these inputs.  
2. Press and hold the HOME ( ) button on the remote  
control for 3 seconds. When the Home channel is saved,  
the channel browser banner will appear at the bottom of  
the screen with the home icon flashing green.  
If you change the input you are viewing:  
a) you will begin a channel history for that input if one did  
not exist; or  
Note: You can set a different Home channel for each input  
(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only).  
b) you will return to the existing channel history for that input  
if one had already been started.  
To set a channel as Home using the menus:  
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.  
The channel browser will store the following channels:  
2. Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER. The Home  
CH Setup window will display.  
• All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the  
remote control.  
• All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the  
CH yz buttons or the Fav CH y z buttons on the remote  
control.  
Home CH Setup  
ANT 1  
--  
--  
--  
ANT 2  
Cable Box  
Note:  
Reset  
Done  
• The channel browser banner will not appear when the POP double  
window is open; however, channels tuned while the POP double  
window is open will be added to the channel browser history for the  
current input.  
Note: "Cable Box" will appear in the Home CH Setup  
window only if you connected a cable box to your TV.  
• The channel browser banner will not appear in the FAV SCAN  
(favorite scan) multi-window. Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN  
multi-window will not be added to the channel browser history;  
however, channels that are tuned from the FAV SCAN multi-window  
for at least 7 seconds will be added to the channel history.  
3. Use the y z buttons to select the input for which you  
want to set the Home channel.  
4. Use the numeric and dash (–) buttons on the remote  
control to enter the desired Home channel for each input.  
5. To save your entries, highlight Done and press ENTER.  
To clear your entries, highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
Clearing channels from the channel history  
Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories  
(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box).  
To tune to the Home channel:  
• Removing the CableCARDwill clear the channel history  
for the ANT 1 input.  
While an input that has a set  
Home channel is active, press the  
HOME ( ) button on the  
remote control.  
• Reconfiguring the ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box input  
will clear the channel history for the newly configured  
input(s).  
Note: If you press the HOME  
button while an input other than  
Note: See page 41 for details on configuring the antenna inputs.  
x /BACK  
an antenna or Cable Box input is  
selected, the TV will tune to the  
most recently tuned Home  
channel and input.  
/NEXT  
HOME (  
)
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
70  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
70  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Tuning channels (continued)  
Tuning your favorite channels  
To tune to the channels you programmed as Favorite Channels,  
see page 44.  
Switching between two channels using  
Channel Return  
The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two  
channels without entering an actual channel number each time.  
Tuning to the next programmed channel  
To tune to the next programmed channel:  
Press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or TV front  
panel.  
1. Select the first channel you want to view.  
2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons  
(and the dash (–) button if selecting a digital channel).  
3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous  
channel will display. Each time you press CH RTN, the TV  
will switch back and forth between the last two channels  
that were selected.  
Note:  
• This feature will not work unless you program channels into the  
TV’s channel memory (see page 42).  
Note:  
• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to  
change analog channels while the recording is in progress. If you  
are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change  
digital channels while the recording is in progress. This is  
because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog)  
will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.  
• If you press CH RTN from a non-antenna input, the TV will  
return to the last-viewed ANT input and channel.  
• If you are currently recording a program, this feature will not  
be available.  
Switching between two channels using  
SurfLock™  
The SurfLockfeature temporarily “memorizes” one channel in  
the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel quickly  
from any other channel by pressing CH RTN.  
Tuning to a specific channel  
(programmed or unprogrammed)  
Tuning analog channels:  
To memorize a channel in the CH RTN button:  
1. Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN  
button.  
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote  
control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.  
Tuning digital channels:  
2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the  
message “Channel Memorized” appears on the screen. The  
channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.  
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote  
control, followed by the – (dash) button and then the sub-  
channel number. For example, to select digital channel 125-1,  
press 1, 2, 5, –, 1.  
3. You can then change channels repeatedly, and when you  
press press CH RTN, the memorized channel will be  
selected.  
Note: If a digital channel is not programmed—either through  
the automatic channel scan (page 42) or the channel add/  
delete function (page 43)—you will have to tune the RF  
channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the  
remote control.  
The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.  
Once you press CH RTN and then change channels again, the  
CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function  
as Channel Return, by switching back and forth between the last  
two channels that were selected.  
Channel Numbers  
(dash)  
CHANNEL yz  
CH RTN  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
71  
HM95_R2_067-78_062705  
71  
6/27/05, 8:06 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Selecting the picture size  
You can view many program formats in a variety of picture  
sizes—Natural, TheaterWide 1, TheaterWide 2, TheaterWide 3,  
and Full—as described below and on the next page.  
Numbers  
PIC SIZE  
The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary  
depending on the format of the program you are viewing. Select  
the picture size that displays the current program the way that  
looks best to you.  
Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your  
TV.  
y
z
To select the picture size:  
1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control.  
2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the  
corresponding number button (0–4) to select the desired  
picture size.  
Note:  
Picture Size  
You also can select the picture size using the  
menu system. Select Picture Size in the  
Video/Theater Settings menu. Select the input  
for which you want to save your picture size  
settings. To save your settings, highlight Done  
and press ENTER.  
0
1
2
3
4
Natural  
TheaterWide 1  
TheaterWide 2  
TheaterWide 3  
Full  
0
4
PIC SIZE  
to Select  
-
/
Note:  
Theater Settings  
Picture Size  
Natural  
You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired  
picture size (or press the yz buttons on the remote control  
while the Picture Size screen is open).  
Picture Scroll  
Cinema Mode  
Auto Aspect Ratio  
--  
Film  
On  
• “Full” may not be available for some program formats (it will  
be “grayed out” in the Picture Size screen).  
Reset  
Done  
Natural picture size  
• The image is displayed close to its originally formatted  
proportion. Some program formats will display with  
sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom.  
Natural picture size example: The way the image displays will  
vary depending on the format of the program you are currently  
watching.  
Conventional picture on a  
conventional TV screen  
Conventional picture in Natural size on  
your wide-screen TV  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
72  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
72  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Selecting the picture size (continued)  
Note:  
TheaterWide 1 picture size (For 4:3 format program)  
• If you select one of the TheaterWide® picture  
sizes, the top and bottom edges of the  
picture (including subtitles or captions) may  
be hidden. To view the hidden edges, either  
scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)  
or try viewing the program in Full or Natural  
picture size.  
• The center of the picture remains close to its  
original proportion, but the left and right  
edges are stretched wider to fill the screen.  
• When selecting the picture size, the way  
the image displays will vary depending on  
the format of the program you are  
currently watching.  
TheaterWide 1 picture size example  
Using these functions to change the  
picture size (i.e., changing the height/  
width ratio) for any purpose other than  
your private viewing may be prohibited  
under the Copyright Laws of the United  
States and other countries, and may  
subject you to civil and criminal liability.  
TheaterWide 2 picture size (for letter box programs)  
• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width  
of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.  
• The top and bottom edges of the picture are  
A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
hidden. To view the hidden areas, see  
“Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on page  
74.  
TheaterWide 2 picture size example  
TheaterWide 3 picture size (for letter box programs with subtitles)  
• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width  
of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.  
• The top and bottom edges are hidden. To view  
A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions),  
see “Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on  
page 74.  
A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
TheaterWide 3 picture size example  
Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source programs only)  
• If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the  
picture is stretched wider to fill the width of  
the screen, but not stretched taller.  
• None of the picture is hidden.  
Full picture size example  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
73  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
73  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture  
Using the auto aspect ratio feature  
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)  
When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the picture size  
is automatically selected when one of the following input  
sources is received:  
You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2 and  
TheaterWide 3 modes for each input.  
• A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.  
To set the scroll settings:  
• A 1080i, 480i, 480p, or 720p signal from the HDMI input.  
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the  
TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture  
size and scroll settings.  
Automatic aspect size  
Aspect ratio  
(automatically selected  
of signal source  
2. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
when Auto Aspect is On)  
4:3 normal  
4:3 letter box  
16:9 full  
Natural (with sidebars)  
TheaterWide 2  
Full  
3. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.  
Video  
Not defined  
(no ID-1 data or  
HDMI aspect data)  
Picture Settings  
User-selected picture size  
(see pages 72–73)  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Note:  
• The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input  
sources.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
• The Auto Aspect Ratio feature is not available when the POP double-  
window is open, the Freeze mode is active, or the TV Guide On Screen®  
system is open.  
4. In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide 2 or  
TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).  
5. Press z to highlight the Picture Scroll field.  
6. Press x or to scroll the picture up and down as needed,  
To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature:  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.  
from –10 to +20.  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
7. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
3. In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On.  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Theater Settings  
Picture Size  
Natural  
Picture Scroll  
Cinema Mode  
Auto Aspect Ratio  
-1  
Film  
On  
Reset  
Done  
To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature:  
Select Off in step 3 above.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
74  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
74  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Selecting the cinema mode  
(480i signals only)  
Selecting the lamp mode  
You can select either the High Bright or Low Power lamp mode.  
• The High Bright mode is useful when additional picture  
brightness is desired (such as in a bright room).  
When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed)  
from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,  
ColorStream HD1/HD2 (component video), or HDMI inputs  
on the TV, smoother motion can be obtained by setting the  
Cinema Mode to Film.  
• The Low Power mode reduces wear on the projection lamp.  
Using this mode should result in longer lamp life.  
See “Lamp unit replacement” on page 103–105.  
To set the Cinema Mode to Film:  
To select the lamp mode:  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
Video  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Picture Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
3. In the Cinema Mode field, select Film.  
3. In the Lamp Mode field, select High Bright or Low Power,  
whichever you prefer.  
Theater Settings  
Picture Size  
Natural  
Advanced Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Picture Scroll  
Cinema Mode  
Auto Aspect Ratio  
-1  
Dynamic Contrast  
MPEG Noise Reduction  
CableClear  
On  
Low  
Film  
On  
Auto  
Reset  
Done  
Color Temperature  
Lamp Mode  
Cool  
Low Power  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Reset  
Done  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
To set the Cinema Mode to Video:  
Select Video in step 3 above.  
Note:  
If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on the TV, the  
lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will switch to Low Power mode  
in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen brightness  
when this happens. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
75  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
75  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the POP features  
Using the POP double-window feature  
The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two  
windows so you can watch two programs at the same time.  
Note:  
• When the main window is in the ANT1 or ANT2  
mode, the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be  
selected for the POP window.  
To display a program in the POP window:  
1. Select the program you want to watch in the main window.  
2. Press SPLIT to open the POP double-window.  
POP double-window  
• When the main window is in Video 1/2/3,  
ColorStream HD1/HD2, HDMI 1, or HDMI 2  
mode, those inputs cannot be selected for the POP  
window.  
You cannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the  
POP window.  
You cannot view two video or two antenna sources  
in both the main and POP windows simultaneously.  
(You can view a video source in one window and  
an antenna source in the other.)  
POP window  
Main window  
ANT1  
POP  
TV12  
Video1  
• The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP  
double-window is open. If you press FREEZE  
when the double-window is open, the message  
“Not available” will appear.  
Green border  
(denotes active window)  
3. Press to highlight the POP (right) window. When highlighted, the window  
will have a green border.  
4. Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window. Select the input source  
for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0–8). The  
current source displays in purple in the POP Input Selection window.  
Numbers  
INPUT  
POP Input Selection  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ANT 1  
Video 1  
Video 2  
Video 3  
ColorSteram HD1  
ColorSteram HD2  
HDMI 1  
ENTER  
HDMI 2  
ANT 2  
0
8
INPUT  
to Select  
-
/
To close the POP window and tune to the highlighted window:  
SPLIT  
Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal picture.  
To close the POP window:  
Press SPLIT or EXIT.  
Notes about recording:  
• If the POP window is open and you attempt to start recording, the POP window will close and  
recording will start.  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to open the POP window  
and the message “Not Available” will appear on-screen.  
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other  
than the TV’s remote control to start recording, you may be able to open the POP window during  
the recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio will reflect the audio of the active window  
(main or POP), which may not be the audio you intended to record.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
76  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
76  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the POP features (continued)  
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP)  
While the POP window is open, press x or to switch the sound (main or POP) that  
is output from the TV speakers (and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals).  
The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border for 15 seconds.  
Example: Press x  
Example: Press •  
x •  
POP double-window aspect ratio  
The POP double-window feature displays each picture according to its input signal  
aspect ratio, as illustrated in the examples below.  
480i  
480i  
480p/720p/1080i  
480i  
Note:  
• The Auto Aspect Ratio feature (page 74) does not  
operate in POP double-window mode.  
• Aspect ratio is the ratio of width to height of the  
picture.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
77  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
77  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the FREEZE feature  
1. When viewing the TV, press FREEZE to make the picture a still picture.  
2. To return to the moving picture, either press FREEZE again, press EXIT, change  
the channel, or change the input.  
Using the FREEZE function for any  
purpose other than your private viewing  
may be prohibited under the Copyright  
Laws of the United States and other  
countries, and may subject you to civil  
and criminal liability.  
Note:  
• The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double-window or FAV SCAN  
multi-window is open. If you press FREEZE when either window is open, the message  
“Not available” will appear.  
• If the TV is left in FREEZE mode, after 15 minutes it will automatically release the  
FREEZE mode and return to the moving picture.  
y
x
z
ENTER  
EXIT  
Moving picture  
Still picture  
Using the favorite channel scan feature  
FREEZE  
You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as  
favorite channels from a nine-picture multi-window.  
FAV SCAN  
Note: To use the favorite channel scan feature, you must first program channels into the  
favorite channel memory. See “Programming your favorite channels” on page 44.  
To scan and tune your favorite channels:  
1. Press FAV SCAN. The TV will display the channels you programmed as favorite  
channels for the current ANT input in a nine-picture multi-window.  
(To display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the other input,  
you must change antenna inputs first (page 67), and then press FAV SCAN.)  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
2
4–1  
11  
4–2  
13  
6
CABLE  
18  
18  
31  
36  
2. Highlight the window for the channel you want to view:  
Either... press the channel’s multi-window position number (1–9, as illustrated  
above, and not the actual channel number) to highlight the window;  
or... use the y z x • buttons to highlight the window.  
The highlighted window will display as a moving picture.  
3. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel and close the multi-window.  
2
4–1  
11  
4–2  
13  
6
18  
31  
36  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
78  
HM95_R2_067-78_061505  
78  
6/27/05, 4:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the picture  
Selecting the picture mode  
Adjusting the picture quality  
You can select your desired picture settings from four picture  
modes, as described below.  
You can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color,  
tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences.  
Mode  
Picture Quality  
Selection  
x Pressing •  
Sports  
Standard  
Movie  
Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting)  
Standard picture settings (factory setting)  
Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting)  
contrast  
brightness  
color  
tint  
sharpness  
lower  
darker  
paler  
reddish  
softer  
higher  
lighter  
deeper  
greenish  
sharper  
Preference Your personal preferences  
To select the picture mode:  
To adjust the picture quality:  
Press PIC MODE on the remote control.  
The following popup menu appears on-  
screen.  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
Picture Settings  
Mode: Standard  
Standard  
Mode  
Video  
Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle  
among the modes.  
Picture Settings  
PIC  
MODE  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
To select the picture mode using the menu system:  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Mode  
Sports  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
100  
50  
50  
0
2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
Tint  
Sharpness  
50  
Reset  
Done  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
3. Press y or z to select the picture quality you want to adjust  
(Contrast, Brightness, Color, Tint, or Sharpness), and then  
x and to adjust the setting, as described in the table  
above.  
Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Mode  
Sports  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
100  
50  
50  
0
Picture Settings  
Mode: Preference  
Sharpness  
70  
Tint  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Sharpness  
50  
Reset  
Done  
3. Press z to highlight the Mode field, and then x • to select  
The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the  
Preference mode (see Selecting the picture mode,above left).  
the mode you prefer.  
Picture Settings  
Mode: Standard  
Standard  
Mode  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Note:  
• The picture mode you selected is for the current input  
selection only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select  
a different picture mode for each input selection.  
• If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,  
Standard, or Movie) and then change a picture quality setting  
(for example, increase the contrast or change the color  
temperature), the picture mode automatically changes to  
Preference in the Picture Settings menu.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
79  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
79  
6/27/05, 5:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the picture (continued)  
Using CableClear/DNR (digital noise  
reduction)  
The CableClear/DNR digital noise reduction feature allows  
you to reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may  
be useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal  
(especially a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette  
or disc. This feature is enabled for 480i signals only.  
Selecting the color temperature  
You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three  
preset color temperatures (cool, medium, and warm), as  
described below.  
Mode  
Picture Quality  
cool  
medium  
warm  
blueish  
neutral  
reddish  
NOTE: The CableClear™/DNR feature does not function in  
ColorStream, HDMI (DVI), ATSC, IEEE1394, and digital Cable  
modes.  
To select the color temperature:  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
To select CableClear/DNR preferences:  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight the Color Temperature field, and then  
press x or to select the mode you prefer (Cool, Medium,  
or Warm).  
3. Press z to highlight the CableClear/DNR field, and then  
press x or to make a selection.  
Video  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Picture Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
AdvancedPictureSettings
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Advanced Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Dynamic Contrast  
MPEG Noise Reduction  
CableClear  
On  
Low  
Auto  
Dynamic Contrast  
MPEG Noise Reduction  
CableClear  
On  
Low  
Auto  
Cool  
Color Temperature  
Lamp Mode  
Cool  
Color Temperature  
Lamp Mode  
Low Power  
Done  
Low Power  
Done  
Reset  
Reset  
Note:  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
• If the current input is Antenna, Video 1, Video 2, or Video 3,  
the menu will display the text “CableClear. The available  
selections are Off, Low, Middle, High, and Auto.  
Note: If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,  
Standard, or Movie) and then change the color temperature, the  
picture mode automatically changes to Preference in the Picture  
Settings menu.  
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or  
HDMI, and the video resolution is 480i, the menu will display  
the text “DNR.” The available selections are Off, Low, Middle,  
High, and Auto. Auto will react proportionally to the strength  
of the noise. Low, Middle, and High will reduce the noise in  
varying degrees from lowest to highest, respectively.  
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or  
HDMI, and the video resolution is not 480i, the menu will  
display the text “DNR” and will be “grayed out” with “Off”  
selected.  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
80  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
80  
6/27/05, 5:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the picture (continued)  
Using MPEG noise reduction  
Using dynamic contrast  
The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce  
visible interference caused by MPEG compression. Choices  
for MPEG noise reduction are High, Medium, Low and Off.  
Off is automatically selected when this feature is disabled  
(grayed out).  
When dynamic contrast is set to On,the TV will detect  
changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your  
contrast settings and automatically adjust the video.  
When dynamic contrast is set to Off,the settings selected in  
the Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used.  
To select the MPEG noise reduction level:  
To select dynamic contrast preferences:  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.  
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight the MPEG Noise Reduction field, and  
3. Press z to highlight the Dynamic Contrast field, and then  
then press x or to make a selection.  
press x or to select either On or Off.  
Video  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Picture Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Advanced Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Dynamic Contrast  
MPEG Noise Reduction  
CableClear  
On  
Low  
Dynamic Contrast  
MPEG Noise Reduction  
CableClear  
On  
Low
Auto  
Auto  
Color Temperature  
Lamp Mode  
Cool  
Color Temperature  
Lamp Mode  
Cool  
Low Power  
Low Power  
Reset  
Done  
Reset  
Done  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Note:  
If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,  
Standard, or Movie) and then set the dynamic contrast to “On,”  
the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in the  
Picture Settings menu.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
81  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
81  
6/27/05, 5:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the closed caption mode  
The closed caption mode has two options:  
Advanced closed captions  
You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by  
changing the background color and the text size, type, edge, and  
color.  
CaptionsAn on-screen display of the dialogue, narration,  
and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are  
closed captioned (usually marked CCin program guides).  
TextAn on-screen display of information not related to  
the current program, such as weather or stock data (when  
provided by individual stations).  
Note:  
• This feature is available for digital channels only.  
You cannot set the Caption  
Text and Background as the  
same color.  
To view captions or text:  
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.  
Preferences  
Favorite Channels  
2. Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press to open  
Closed Caption Mode  
CC1  
To customize the closed  
captions:  
Closed Caption Advanced  
the menu sidebar.  
Input Labeling  
English  
Menu Language  
Home CH Setup  
3. Press z to highlight the desired closed caption mode and  
1. Press MENU and open  
the Preferences menu.  
then press ENTER.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
2. Highlight Closed  
Caption Advanced and  
press ENTER.  
Preferences  
Favorite Channels  
Closed Caption Mode  
Closed Caption Advanced  
Input Labeling  
Off  
CC1  
CC2  
CC3  
CC4  
T1  
Off  
3. Press y or z  
Advanced Closed Captions  
English  
Menu Language  
Home CH Setup  
to highlight  
the  
characteristic  
you want to  
change, and  
then press x  
or to select  
Caption Size  
Auto  
Caption Text Type  
Caption Text Edge  
Caption Text Color  
Background Color  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
T2  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
To view captions:  
Highlight CC1,  
CC2, CC3, or  
CC4. (CC1 displays  
translation of the  
primary language in  
your area.)  
Reset  
Done  
the format for that characteristic.  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Giant pandas eat leaves.  
Note: If the  
program or video  
Caption Size  
Auto, Small, Standard, Large  
you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display  
on-screen.  
Caption Text Type  
Auto, Default, Mono w/serif, Professional  
w/serif, Mono w/o serif, Proper w/o serif,  
Casual, Cursive, Small capitals  
To view text:  
Highlight T1, T2,  
T3, or T4.  
Caption Text Edge  
Caption Text Color  
Auto, None, Raised, Depressed, Uniform,  
Left drop shadow, Right drop shadow  
Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,  
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan  
Note: If text is not  
available in your  
area, a black  
rectangle may  
appear on your  
screen. If this  
WORLD WEATHER  
Temps  
Current  
Weather  
Clear  
Cloudy  
Clear  
F
C
Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,  
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan  
Background Color  
LONDON  
MOSCOW  
PARIS  
ROME  
TOKYO  
51  
57  
53  
66  
65  
11  
14  
12  
19  
18  
Cloudy  
Rain  
happens, turn the Closed Caption Mode OFF.  
To turn off the Closed Caption mode:  
Highlight OFF.  
Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations:  
• When a videotape has been dubbed  
• When the signal reception is weak  
• When the signal reception is non-standard  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
82  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
82  
6/27/05, 5:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the closed caption mode (continued)  
Digital closed captions  
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital  
closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily  
override closed captions for digital channels only.  
When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio  
selector presents a default list of services. If the selected service is  
not available, the next best service will be used instead.  
To select digital closed captions:  
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.  
Applications  
TV Guide On Screen  
Audio Player  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
CableCARD  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER.  
3. Press y or z to select Closed Caption, and then press  
x or to select the desired service.  
Audio  
CC 1  
Service 1  
Closed Caption  
4. Press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
83  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
83  
6/27/05, 5:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the audio  
Muting the sound  
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts  
Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off  
(MUTE) the sound. Each time you press MUTE, the mute  
mode will change in the following order.  
The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to  
output high-fidelity stereo sound. MTS also can transmit a  
second audio program (SAP) containing a second language,  
music, or other audio information (when provided by individual  
stations).  
1/2 Mute Mute Volume →  
If the closed caption mode is set to OFF when you select  
MUTEmode, the closed caption feature is automatically  
activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating  
the closed caption feature, use the VOL z button to set the  
volume to 0. See Using the closed caption modeon page 82  
for more information on closed caption modes.  
The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO  
mode. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the  
word STEREOor SAPappears on-screen when RECALL is  
pressed.  
To listen to stereo sound:  
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.  
Audio  
VOL z  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
RECALL  
MUTE  
3. Press z to highlight the MTS field, and then press x or •  
to select Stereo.  
Audio Setup  
Using the digital audio selector  
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently  
switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those  
channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily  
overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under  
Audio Setup.  
MTS  
Stereo  
English  
Language  
Speakers  
On  
Optical Output Format  
Dolby Digital  
Reset  
Done  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,  
highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.  
2. Highlight Digital CC/  
Audio Selector and press  
Applications  
Note:  
ENTER.  
TV Guide On Screen  
You can leave the TV in Stereo mode because it automatically  
outputs the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural).  
Audio Player  
3. Press y or z to select  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
Audio, and then press x  
CableCARD  
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select MONO to reduce the noise.  
or to select the desired  
service.  
To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station  
(if available):  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Highlight the Language field in step 3 above, and then press  
x or to select the language you prefer.  
Audio  
CC 1  
Service 1  
Closed Caption  
4. Press ENTER.  
To listen to a second audio program on an analog station  
(if available):  
Select SAP in step 3 above.  
Note:  
• A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on those TV  
stations that offer it. For example, a station might broadcast another  
language as a second audio program. If you have SAP on, you will  
see the current program on the screen but hear the other language  
instead of the program’s normal audio.  
• If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not  
broadcasting a second audio program, the station’s normal audio  
will be output. However, occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP  
mode. If this happens, set the MTS feature to Stereo mode.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
84  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
84  
6/27/05, 5:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the audio (continued)  
Adjusting the audio quality  
You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass, treble,  
and balance.  
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,  
highlight Reset and pres ENTER.  
To turn off the SBS:  
To adjust the audio quality:  
Highlight Off in step 3.  
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.  
Using the StableSound® feature  
Audio  
The StableSound® feature limits the highest volume level to  
prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source  
changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume  
that often happens when a TV program switches to a  
commercial).  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
To turn on the StableSound® feature:  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight the item you want to adjust (Bass,  
Treble, or Balance).  
Audio Settings  
Bass  
100  
100  
0
Audio  
Treble  
Audio Settings  
Balance  
SBS  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
On  
Off  
SBS Level  
StableSound  
85  
Reset  
Done  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
4. Press x or to adjust the level.  
3. Press z to highlight StableSound, and then press x or to  
x makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance  
in the left channel (depending on the item selected).  
select On.  
Audio Settings  
makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance  
in the right channel (depending on the item selected).  
Bass  
100  
100  
0
Treble  
Balance  
SBS  
On  
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,  
highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
SBS Level  
StableSound  
85  
Off  
Reset  
Done  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,  
highlight Reset and press ENTER.  
Using the sub-bass system (SBS)  
The sub-bass system allows you to enhance bass performance,  
even when the volume is low.  
Note: The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to  
the following factory settings:  
To turn on the SBS and adjust the level:  
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
2. Highlight Audio settings and press ENTER.  
Bass ............. center (50)  
Treble .......... center (50)  
Balance ........ center (0)  
StableSound... Off  
3. Press z to highlight SBS, and then press x or to select  
On.  
4. Press y or z to highlight SBS Level, and then press x or •  
To turn off the StableSound® feature:  
to adjust the sub-bass system.  
Select Off in step 3 above.  
Audio Settings  
Bass  
100  
100  
0
Treble  
Balance  
SBS  
On  
Off  
SBS Level  
StableSound  
85  
Reset  
Done  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
85  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
85  
6/27/05, 5:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the audio (continued)  
Using the SRS WOWsurround sound  
feature  
WOWis a special combination of SRS Labs audio  
technologies (SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a  
thrilling surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from  
stereo sound sources. Your TVs audio will sound fuller, richer,  
and wider.  
To turn off the built-in speakers:  
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
To adjust the WOWsettings:  
1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see Selecting stereo/SAP  
3. Press z to highlight the Speakers field, and then press x or  
broadcastson page 84).  
to select Off.  
2. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
Audio Setup  
MTS  
Stereo  
English  
3. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.  
Language  
Speakers  
On  
Optical Output Format  
Dolby Digital  
Reset  
Done  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
4. Press z or y to highlight the WOW feature you want to  
To turn on the built-in speakers:  
adjust, and then press x or to adjust the item.  
Select On in step 3 above.  
Advanced Audio Settings  
WOW: SRS 3D  
WOW: FOCUS  
WOW: TruBass  
Off  
Off  
Selecting the optical audio output  
format  
Low  
Reset  
Done  
Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when  
you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio  
system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see  
Connecting a digital audio systemon page 20).  
WOW: SRS 3D To turn the surround sound effect On  
or Off.  
Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the 3D effect does not  
work.  
To select the optical audio output format:  
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.  
2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.  
WOW: Focus To turn the vocal emphasis effect On or  
Off.  
WOW: TruBass To select the desired bass expansion  
level (High, Low, or Off).  
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
Turning off the built-in speakers  
Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect  
an audio system to your TV (see Connecting a digital audio  
systemand Connecting an analog audio systemon page 20).  
3. Press z to highlight the Optical Output Format field, and  
then press x or to select either Dolby Digital or PCM,  
depending on your device.  
Audio Setup  
MTS  
Stereo  
English  
Language  
Speakers  
On  
Optical Output Format  
Dolby Digital  
Reset  
Done  
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press  
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset  
and press ENTER.  
______________  
• WOW, SRS and  
incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW technology is  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
86  
HM95_R2_079-86_061505  
86  
6/27/05, 5:12 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player  
You can use the memory card slots on the TV side panel to view  
compatible JPEG files or play compatible MP3 files stored on a  
memory card (see “Memory card specifications” below and at  
right). You can display JPEG files in thumbnail mode or view  
them as a slide show.  
Maximum memory card capacity: 512 MB.  
Maximum displayable JPEG image size: 8 MB.  
JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display.  
Maximum MP3 file size:  
MP3 files have no size limit other than the maximum capacity  
Note:  
• Never remove the memory card or turn off the TV while  
using the memory card. Doing so may result in loss of data  
and/or damage to the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE  
IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
It is recommended that you back up your memory card data. Toshiba  
is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card  
with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate for any lost data or  
recording(s) caused by the use of such cards.  
For instructions on using your digital camera, refer to the owners  
manual for your camera.  
For instructions on using your memory card, refer to the owners  
manual for your memory card.  
Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of  
pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to  
the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY  
YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. See Memory card care and  
handlingon page 90.  
The technical criteria set out in this owners manual are meant as a  
guide only.  
Permission is required in order to download MP3 files and music from  
the Internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission. Permission  
should always be sought from the copyright owner.  
of the memory card.  
Maximum displayable JPEG image resolution: 6000x4000  
pixels.  
Maximum number of files per directory: 370.  
• All files over the 370th in a single directory will not display/play.  
• Files in directories more than 10 levels down from the top level  
directory will not display/play.  
Maximum number of files per memory card: JPEG = 1,000;  
MP3 = 200.  
• All JPEG files over the 1,000th on a single memory card will not  
display.  
• All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card will not play.  
File name restrictions:  
• File names cannot contain the following characters: \ / : ? “ < > | .  
• File names must contain US-ASCII characters only.  
• The maximum file name length is 255 characters.  
• The memory card reader recognizes only “.mp3” and “.jpg”  
file extensions.  
• The MP3 player supports only ISO-8859-1 (US-ASCII/Western  
European) character sets for MP3 meta-data (e.g, artist name,  
album name, song title, etc.)  
Memory card specifications  
Supported memory card types:  
JPEG picture viewer:  
• The picture viewer supports JPEG format images only.  
Memory Card (ver. 1.0)  
– MMC (MultiMediaCard)  
– MemoryStick(Pro)  
– xD-Picture Card(16MB-512MB)  
– CompactFlash® memory card (Type1)  
• The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory  
format compatible with the TV or they will not display on the TV.  
• Images processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC)  
may not display properly or at all. Some digital cameras may store  
images in a format that is not compatible with the TV.  
Note: The picture viewer and audio player support FAT16 formatted  
cards only. Other memory card formats (including, but not limited to,  
FAT32 and NTFS) are not supported.  
MP3 audio player:  
• The audio player supports MP3 format files only.  
• The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory  
format compatible with the TV or they will not play.  
______________  
• Files processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC) may  
not play properly or at all. Some MP3 files may be in a format that  
is not compatible with the TV.  
is a trademark of SD Card Association.  
MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG  
and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).  
• MP3 files must have the following format:  
- MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3.  
Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.  
Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® and CF logo®  
- Sampling frequency—MPEG1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz.  
- Bitrate—MPEG1: 32–320 kbps.  
registered trademarks.  
- Channels—Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Single channel.  
- ID3 Ver. 1, Ver. 2.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
87  
HM95_R2_087-92_061505  
87  
6/27/05, 6:07 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player (continued)  
2. In a few seconds, the images automatically display on-  
Using the JPEG picture viewer  
screen, with one as a large picture and six in thumbnail  
format.  
Note: If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same  
memory card, the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically  
when you insert the memory card in the TV. To start the audio  
player, you must first press EXIT to close the picture viewer and  
then start the audio player while the memory card is still  
inserted. See To start the MP3 audio player when a memory  
card is already inserted,on page 90. You cannot use the  
picture viewer and audio player at the same time.  
Picture Viewer  
1
of  
6
May 28 04  
2
of  
6
Jan  
8
04  
3
of  
6
Jan 18 04  
4
of  
6
May 12 04  
5
of  
6
Sep 18 04  
6
of  
6
Sep 18 04  
Rotate  
Next  
Slide Show  
EXIT Exit  
To view digital photos on your TV:  
3. Press x to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise.  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card  
slot on the side of your TV.  
Picture Viewer  
1
of  
6
May 28 04  
2
of  
6
Note:  
Jan  
8
04  
3
of  
6
Jan 18 04  
Never insert more than one memory card at one time.  
4
of  
6
May 12 04  
Be sure to insert the card correctlylabel side facing left and  
the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the  
memory card slot.  
5
of  
6
Sep 18 04  
6
of  
6
Sep 18 04  
Rotate  
Next  
Slide Show  
EXIT Exit  
When a Compact Flash memory card is inserted correctly, the  
ejector button pops out (see illustration below).  
4. Press to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise.  
Picture Viewer  
1
of  
6
May 28 04  
2
of  
6
Memory card slots  
Jan  
8
04  
3
of  
6
Jan 18 04  
4
of  
6
May 12 04  
5
of  
6
Sep 18 04  
6
of  
6
Sep 18 04  
TV side  
panel  
Rotate  
Next  
Slide Show  
EXIT Exit  
5. Press y or z to select another picture as the large picture.  
6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.  
Picture Viewer  
CompactFlash  
ejector button  
During the slide show:  
or  
To stop on an image during the slide show, press ENTER.  
To resume the slide show, press ENTER again.  
or  
To rotate the picture, press x or , and then press ENTER.  
CompactFlash  
memory card  
To select another image, press y or z, and then press  
ENTER.  
xD-Picture Card  
MMC  
(MultiMediaCard)  
To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer,  
press CH RTN.  
To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen,  
press EXIT.  
or  
Secure Digital  
SD  
Memory Stick  
(Secure Digital)  
memory card  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
88  
HM95_R2_087-92_061505  
88  
6/27/05, 6:07 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player (continued)  
To set the slide show interval:  
Using the MP3 audio player  
Note: The picture viewer must be closed before you can set the  
slide show interval.  
Note:  
If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same memory card,  
the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically when you insert the  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER. Select the  
interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or 20  
seconds).  
memory card in the TV. To start the audio player, you must first press  
EXIT to close the picture viewer and then start the audio player while  
the memory card is still inserted. See To start the MP3 audio player  
when a memory card is already inserted,next page. You cannot  
use the picture viewer and audio player at the same time.  
Setup  
Make all desired adjustments to the surround, bass, treble, and  
balance before starting the MP3 audio player.  
Permission is required in order to download MP3 files and music from  
the Internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission. Permission  
should always be sought from the copyright owner.  
Installation  
2 sec  
5 sec  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
10 sec  
15 sec  
20 sec  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Auto  
Auto  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is not  
already inserted:  
To close the picture viewer:  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card  
slot on the side of your TV (see page 88 for details).  
Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the regular  
TV screen.  
Note:  
Never insert more than one memory card at a time.  
To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still  
inserted:  
Be sure to insert the card correctlylabel side facing left and  
the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the  
memory card slot.  
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.  
2. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER.  
When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the  
ejector button pops out (see page 88).  
2. If you have only MP3 files on the memory card, the audio  
player will launch within a few seconds after being inserted  
and begin playing the first MP3 file on the memory card.  
Applications  
TV Guide On Screen  
Audio Player  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
CableCARD  
Audio Player  
Title  
Artist  
Ser No.1 in D, Op.11...  
SCO/Sir Charles...  
Vol  
Requiem, Op. 5: IV. R... Robert Shaw/Atla...  
Rapsodie Espagnole:... Jesus Lopez-Cobo...  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Moolight Sonata, movement  
A-M Classical  
III. Sanctus: Sanctu...  
Boston Baroque/M...  
Piano Sonata, K. 545... A-M Classical  
Pathétique Sonata, m... A-M Classical  
3. Follow the steps under “To view digital photos on your  
TV” on the previous page.  
Chopin Prelude No. ...  
Piano Sonata, K. 545...  
Andrys  
A-M Classical  
A-M Classical  
Moolight Sonata, mo...  
To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:  
1. Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the  
regular TV screen.  
Navigate  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
3. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast  
forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute  
buttons, or to select another MP3, and then press ENTER.  
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE  
VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE  
MEMORY CARD.  
If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures, the card  
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE  
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
To use the mute function  
Press yz x • to select the  
(mute) button, and then press  
ENTER. See page 84 for details on muting the sound.  
2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button  
and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all  
other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
89  
HM95_R2_087-92_061505  
89  
6/27/05, 6:07 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player (continued)  
Using the MP3 audio player (continued)  
Memory card care and handling  
• Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of  
memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which  
can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or  
ejected.  
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is  
already inserted:  
1. Press MENU and open  
the Applications menu.  
Applications  
• If the image does not appear correctly or the audio file does  
not play correctly, clean the metallic area of the memory  
card using a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth and then  
reinsert the card.  
2. Highlight Audio Player  
TV Guide On Screen  
Audio Player  
and press ENTER.  
Picture Viewer  
Digital CC/Audio Selector  
CableCARD  
3. Press yz x • to  
navigate to the rewind,  
pause, fast forward, skip  
backward, skip forward,  
• Prevent the metallic area on the memory card from coming  
in contact with dust, dirt, or other foreign particles. Do not  
touch the metallic area of the memory card with your hands  
or otherwise handle it with anything other than a soft, dry,  
lint-free, anti-static cloth.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
volume, and mute buttons, and then press ENTER.  
Note: After 30 seconds a screen saver will appear. To access the  
screen saver immediately, press any button on the remote control.  
Note: Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use  
of any memory card with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate  
for any lost data or recordings caused by the use of such  
cards.  
To close the MP3 audio player:  
Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular  
TV screen.  
To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:  
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO  
PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING THE  
MEMORY CARD.  
1. Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the  
regular TV screen.  
If you remove the memory card while playing MP3 files, the card  
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE  
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button  
and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all  
other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
90  
HM95_R2_087-92_061505  
90  
6/27/05, 6:07 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Setting the On/Off Timer  
Setting the sleep timer  
You can use the On/Off Timer to turn the TV on and off at a  
preset time on a recurring basis.  
Note: You must first set the time (see page 50).  
You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length  
of time (maximum of 3 hours). The sleep timer turns off the TV  
one time only, as opposed to the On/Off Timer, which turns off  
the TV on a recurring basis.  
To set the On/Off Timer:  
To set the sleep timer:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight On/Off Timer and press ENTER.  
Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until  
the TV turns off. Repeatedly press SLEEP to increase the time in  
10-minute increments or press y or z to increase or decrease the  
time in 10-minute increments, to a maximum of 3 hours and 00  
minutes.  
Setup  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
To cancel the sleep timer:  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Press SLEEP until it is set to 0.  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
SLEEP  
3. Press z to highlight the DAY field, and then press x or •  
to select the recurrence (weekends, weekdays, every day,  
etc).  
To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
On/Off Timer  
Turn TV ON:  
2. Press z to highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER.  
Day  
Weekends  
9 : 0 AM  
30 Minutes  
0
0
Time (HH:MM)  
TV ON Duration:  
Setup  
Reset  
Cancel  
Done  
Installation  
Sleep Timer  
On/Off Timer  
4. Press z to highlight the Time field, and then use the  
Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to turn  
on.  
HDMI 1 Audio  
Auto  
Auto  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
2 Sec  
15 min  
5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press x or to  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
select AM or PM.  
3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in  
10-minute increments.  
6. Press z to highlight the TV ON Duration field, and then  
press x or to select the length of time until the TV turns  
off.  
Sleep Timer  
7. Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
Enter total minutes until the TV  
turns off automatically (Maximum  
180 minutes)  
8. Turn off the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the  
day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off  
automatically after the length of time you set in the TV  
ON Duration field.  
1 2 0  
Cancel  
Done  
Note:  
4. Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
When a power failure occurs, the On/Off Timer settings may  
be cleared.  
Note:  
When a power failure occurs, the sleep timer setting may be cleared.  
To display the On Timer setting, press RECALL.  
To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer, press RECALL.  
To turn off the On/Off Timer:  
To display the remaining time on the sleep timer:  
Select Not Set in step 3 above.  
Press SLEEP.  
On/Off Timer  
Sleep Timer  
Turn TV ON:  
Day  
Not Set  
1h10m  
Note:  
A message will display on-screen when there is one minute  
Reset  
Cancel  
Done  
remaining on the sleep timer.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
91  
HM95_R2_087-92_061505  
91  
6/27/05, 6:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Displaying the Channel Banner  
Understanding the auto power off  
feature  
To display the channel banner:  
Press RECALL on the remote control.  
The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15  
minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that  
completes its broadcast for the day. This feature functions in  
ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only.  
The following information will display in the channel banner  
(if applicable):  
• Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)  
• If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is  
STEREO  
Tuner Hold: On  
Cable TV (“CABLE”) or  
off-air (“TV”)  
NC-17  
Understanding the last mode  
memory feature  
• Channel number (if in  
ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode)  
On Timer: Weekdays 12:00pm  
Sleep Timer: 18 min.  
Game Timer: 28 min.  
ANT 1  
• Signal strength indicator  
(bar graph in lower right  
corner of banner; for  
ATSC signal only)  
Natural  
5:32pm  
1080i  
CABLE 81-1  
If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last  
Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when  
the power is resupplied.  
Sample channel banner screen  
Note: The signal strength indicator will react to fading and  
increasing signals and could display longer than the normal  
channel banner screen.  
NOTE: You should unplug the TVs power cord if it is possible  
that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time  
after the power is restored.  
• Time (if set)  
• On/Off timer settings (if set)  
• Remaining time on sleep timer (if set)  
• Remaining time on game timer (if set)  
• Stereo or SAP audio status  
• V-Chip rating status  
Using the gray level feature  
The gray level feature will set the sidebars to three different  
levels of darkness. Sidebars are the blanks spaces on either side of  
a 4:3 viewing area.  
• Picture size  
Tuner hold* (if applicable)  
To set the gray level of the sidebars:  
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.  
2. Highlight Gray Level and press .  
*If you are recording on one tuner (for example, the digital  
tuner), you will be able to change channels on the other tuner  
only (the analog tuner in this example). The tuner from which  
you are recording is on hold(i.e., locked) so your  
3. Press y or z to select your desired level of darkness  
recordings will not be affected by channel changes.  
(1 – Black, 2 – Dark Gray or 3 – Gray).  
• Aspect ratio  
• Lamp mode (appears only if the TV is in Hi Bright mode)  
Setup  
To close the channel banner:  
Sleep Timer  
1
2
3
Press RECALL again.  
On/Off Timer  
HDMI 1 Audio  
HDMI 2 Audio  
Slide Show Interval  
AVHD Skip Time  
Gray Level  
Auto  
Auto  
2 Sec  
15 min  
2
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Note:  
The gray level feature does not affect video being viewed in  
16:9 aspect ratio.  
When receiving a signal that has sidebars (e.g., 4:3 aspect  
ratio video over a 1080i or 720p signal), the gray level feature  
will not be applied to the sidebars.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
92  
HM95_R2_087-92_061505  
92  
6/27/05, 6:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Using the Locks menu  
9
The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input Lock, Front Panel Lock, Game  
Timer, and New PIN Code features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code.  
Entering the PIN code  
If you cannot remember your  
PIN code  
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL  
four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be cleared and  
you can enter a new PIN code.  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
New PIN Code  
Changing your PIN code  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER.  
2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entry screen.  
• The Lock System screen (below) appears if a PIN code has  
not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to  
enter a new four-digit code, enter the code a second time to  
confirm, and press ENTER.  
Lock System  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Please enter a 4 digit PIN code  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Confirm PIN code  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
New PIN Code  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Cancel  
Done  
5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.  
Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered.  
6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active.  
• The Locks/Active screen (below) appears if the PIN code is  
already stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter  
your four-digit code and press ENTER.  
New PIN Code  
Locks  
Active  
Please enter a 4 digit PIN code  
Please enter the 4 digit PIN code  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Confirm PIN code  
*
*
*
*
Cancel  
Done  
Cancel  
Done  
If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message “Incorrect PIN  
code, please try again!” appears. Highlight Retry and press  
ENTER. Enter the code again and press ENTER.  
When the correct PIN code is entered, the Locks menu opens.  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
New PIN Code  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
93  
HM95_R2_093-96_061505  
93  
6/27/05, 6:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu  
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip)  
Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the  
Independent rating system for broadcasters  
content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The  
V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the  
programs according to the ratings you select. (See the tables at  
right for rating descriptions.)  
Ratings  
Description and Content themes  
TV-MA Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed  
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for  
children under 17.)  
Note: Rating blocking is a function of the V-Chip feature in this  
TV, which supports the U.S. V-Chip system only.  
L) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity  
V) Graphic violence  
TV-14 Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some  
material that many parents would find unsuitable for children  
under 14 years of age.)  
To block and unblock TV programs and movies:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight Enable Rating Blocking.  
D) Intensely suggestive dialog L) Strong, coarse language  
S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence  
TV-PG Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains  
material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.)  
D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language  
S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence  
5. Press and then z to select On, and then press ENTER.  
TV-G  
General Audience (Most parents would find this program  
suitable for all ages.)  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Off  
TV-Y7, Directed to Older Children (This program is designed  
TV-Y7FV for children age 7 and above. Note: Programs in which  
fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative  
than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV.)  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
New PIN Code  
TV-Y  
All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for  
all children.)  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
6. Press z to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER.  
Independent rating system for movies  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Rating  
Description and content themes  
X-rated (For adults only)  
X
Off  
Off  
Off  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
NC-17 Not intended for anyone 17 and under  
Restricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult)  
New PIN Code  
R
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
PG-13 Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be  
inappropriate for children under 13)  
The Edit Rating Limits screen (below) appears.  
PG  
G
Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be  
suitable for children)  
7. Press yzx • and then press ENTER to select the level of  
blocking you prefer. A box with an “X” is a rating that will  
be blocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition for the  
rating appears at the bottom of the screen. See notes at  
right.  
General Audience (Appropriate for all ages)  
Note:  
8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block,  
highlight Done and press ENTER.  
• If you place an “X” in the box next to “None” Rated or “No Rating,”  
programs rated “None” or “No Rating” will be blocked. However, if  
the program does not provide any rating information, nothing will be  
displayed in the banner and ratings blocking will not take effect.  
Edit Rating Limits  
Movies  
G
TV (V-CHIP) FV  
TV-Y  
D
L
S
V
Children  
Youth  
To display the rating of the program you are watching, press  
RECALL on the remote control. If it is not rated, the word “NONE”  
appears.  
TV-Y7  
TV-G  
PG  
PG-13  
R
TV-PG  
TV-14  
TV-MA  
NC-17  
X
Cancel  
Done  
TV PG  
L
V
NONE  
"None" Rated or "No Rating"  
This program is designed for children age  
7
and adove.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
94  
HM95_R2_093-96_061505  
94  
6/27/05, 6:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu  
Blocking channels  
Unlocking programs temporarily  
With the Channels Block feature, you can block specific  
channels. You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless  
you clear the setting first.  
If you try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits  
you set, the TV enters program lock mode. You can either  
unlock the program temporarily or select a non-locked program  
to watch.  
To block channels:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
2. Press z, which displays  
the PIN code entering  
screen.  
Locks  
To temporarily unlock the program:  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
1. Press MUTE.  
3. Enter your four-digit  
PIN code (see page 93  
for details).  
Off  
Off  
Off  
2. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. If the  
correct code is entered,  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Locks  
Active  
New PIN Code  
the program lock mode  
is released and the  
normal picture appears.  
All locking is disabled  
until the TV is turned  
off, and will be enabled  
when the TV is turned on again.  
4. Press z to highlight  
Channels Block and  
then press ENTER.  
Enter PIN code to temporaily un-  
block.  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
*
*
*
*
5. Using the yz x • buttons, select the input for which you  
want to change the rating limits (ANT1, ANT2, or Cable  
Box, if connected) and press ENTER.  
Cancel  
Done  
A list of the channels available for that input will be  
displayed along with the call letters for each channel, if  
available.  
Locking video inputs  
Channels Block  
ANT 1  
6. Press yz x • to  
highlight the channel  
you want to block, then  
press ENTER, which  
puts an “X” in the box  
next to that channel.  
You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video input  
sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1,  
ColorStream HD-2, HDMI 1/HDMI 2) and channels 3 and 4.  
You will not be able to view the input sources or channels until  
you turn off the input lock.  
1
2
ANT 1  
ANT 2  
3
Cable Box  
4
5
6
7
Allow All  
Block All  
Cancel  
Done  
8
7. Repeat step 6 for other  
channels you want to  
block.  
To lock the video inputs:  
9
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press .  
4. Press z to highlight Input Lock and press .  
10  
8. Highlight Done and press ENTER.  
To unblock individual channels:  
In step 6 above, press yzx • to highlight the channel you  
want to unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the X from  
the box.  
5. Press y or z to select the level of video input locking you  
prefer, as described below:  
VIDEO: Locks VIDEO  
1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
ColorStream HD1/  
HD2, and HDMI.  
Channels Block  
ANT 1  
ANT 1  
To block all channels at  
once:  
Locks  
1
2
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Off  
Video  
Video +  
ANT 2  
Highlight Block All  
in step 6 above.  
3
Cable Box  
Off  
Off  
Off  
4
VIDEO+: Locks  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
5
VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,  
VIDEO 3, ColorStream  
HD1/HD2, HDMI 1/  
HDMI 2, and channels  
3 and 4. Select VIDEO+ if you use the antenna terminal to  
play a video tape.  
6
New PIN Code  
To unblock all locked  
channels at once:  
7
Allow All  
Block All  
Cancel  
Done  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
8
9
Highlight Allow All  
in step 6 above.  
10  
Note: Channel blocking may not take effect if you have a cable box  
connected and use the cable box controls to change channels.  
Note: Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4.  
Off: Unlocks all video input sources.  
6. Press ENTER.  
Note: When the CableCARD™ is inserted, Video+ will behave the same  
as Video lock.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
95  
HM95_R2_093-96_061505  
95  
6/27/05, 6:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu  
Using the GameTimer™  
Using the front panel lock feature  
You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a  
video game (30–120 minutes). When the GameTimer is  
activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out  
the input source for the video game device.  
You can lock the front panel touchpad to prevent your settings  
from being changed accidentally (by children, for example).  
When the front panel lock is On, none of the controls on the  
TV front touchpad will operate except POWER.  
To set the GameTimer:  
To lock the front panel:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press .  
4. Press z to highlight Game Timer and then press .  
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight Front Panel Lock.  
5. Press y or z to select the length of time until the Video  
Lock is activated (30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes) and press  
ENTER.  
5. Press to highlight On and press ENTER. When the front  
panel is locked and a button on the touchpad is pressed, the  
message “Not Available” appears.  
Locks  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Off  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Off  
Off  
30 Min  
60 Min  
90 Min  
120 Min  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
New PIN Code  
New PIN Code  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
Navigate  
CH RTN  
Back  
EXIT Exit  
Select  
To cancel the GameTimer:  
To unlock the front panel:  
Select Off in step 5 above.  
Highlight Off in step 5 above, or press and hold the  
VOLUME x button on the TV front panel for about 10  
seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.  
To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has  
activated it:  
Set the VIDEO LOCK to OFF (see “Locking video inputs” on  
page 95).  
TV front touchpad  
Note:  
• A message will appear on-screen when 10 minutes, 3  
minutes, and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer.  
• If the TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer,  
when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK mode  
(as if the GameTimer had expired) and you will have to  
deactivate the video lock (as described above).  
VOLUME x  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
96  
HM95_R2_093-96_061505  
96  
6/27/05, 6:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Troubleshooting  
10  
Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptom and some solutions.  
Symptom  
Solution  
TV will not turn on  
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and then press POWER.  
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or try the front panel buttons.  
• If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp unit and lamp unit door are installed  
properly (pages 103–105).  
• The lamp unit may need to be replaced (pages 103–105). Also see “LED indications” on page 99.  
No picture after TV is turned on  
When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit to get hot, it may take several minutes for  
the picture to appear on-screen. See "IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP RESTART" on page 8.  
Picture problems  
• Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2).  
• Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel and select a valid video input  
source (page 67). If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV, no picture will display when  
you select that particular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2.  
• Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable).  
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.  
• Adjust the picture qualities (page 79).  
• If you are using a VCR, make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 26).  
• If you have two VCRs connected to your TV, do not connect the same VCR to the TV’s output and input  
connections at the same time (page 18).  
• Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the TV back (or  
VIDEO-3 on the TV side) at the same time (Chapter 2).  
Noisy picture  
• If you are watching a tuned analog channel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear®/DNR  
feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (page 80).  
Video Input Selection  
problems  
• If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or  
TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel, press INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time, which will change to the next  
video input source and display the Input Selection window.  
Cannot view external signals  
or channel 3 or 4  
• If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,  
VIDEO 3, or ColorStream,® or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the Input Lock is set to Off (page 95).  
Black box on screen  
Poor color or no color  
• Set the Closed Caption feature to Off (page 82).  
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.  
• Adjust the Tint and/or Color (page 79).  
• When the ColorStream® signal source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive  
video from the VIDEO OUT signal, a standard video or S-video IN terminal must be used instead of the  
ColorStream® connections.  
POP problems  
• The VIDEO OUT terminal will not output the POP picture (pages 18 and 76).  
• If you label all of the inputs as “Hide,” the POP feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the  
POP feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen (page 68).  
Picture brightness changes  
soon after turning on TV  
If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on the TV, the lamp will start out in High Bright  
mode but will switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen  
brightness when this happens. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. (See page 75.)  
Picture and sound are out of sync • As with all products that contain a digital display, in rare instances, when viewing certain content  
(e.g., television broadcasts, video games, DVDs), you may notice that the picture and sound are slightly  
out of sync. This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including, without limitation, video  
processing within the TV, video processing in an attached gaming system, and video processing/different  
compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming. You may want to try one or more of the  
following suggestions, which may help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon:  
- If the TV is connected to an A/V receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature, use this feature  
to help synchronize the sound to the picture.  
- If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels, please contact your local broadcast,  
cable, or satellite provider to inform them of this issue.  
Memory card  
• Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format (page 87).  
• Make sure you have saved the picture files in the correct file format (page 87).  
• The card may be inserted improperly. Remove the card and reinsert it (page 88).  
• The memory card may be empty.  
problems  
• The memory card may be damaged.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
97  
HM95_R2_097-102_061505  
97  
6/27/05, 8:14 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
Symptom  
Solution  
Sound problems  
• Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2).  
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.  
• The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME.  
• If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 84).  
• Make sure the Speakers function in the Audio Setup menu is set correctly (page 86).  
• If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS feature is set  
to SAP mode (page 84).  
• If you hear audio that seems “incorrect” for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign  
language), the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 84).  
• When using an external audio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR. AUDIO OUT terminals, the  
volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 20).  
Remote control problems  
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 28).  
• Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV.  
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 28).  
Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Refer to the owner’s manual  
for your other device to determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific  
feature on another device, use the remote control that came with the device (page 28).  
• If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turn off the  
TV, press and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.  
• If the TV still does not act as expected, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 52.  
Channel tuning problems  
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 28).  
• The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete feature. Add the  
channel to the channel memory (page 43).  
• The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature. Unblock the channel (page 95).  
• If you are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 41). If you are still unable to  
tune digital channels, clear all channels from the channel list (page 43) and reprogram channels into the  
channel memory (page 42). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, use the Restore Factory Defaults  
procedure as described on page 52. Also see “Other problems,” below.  
Closed caption problems  
• If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen (page 82).  
• If text is not available, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, turn off the closed caption  
feature (page 82).  
• A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has been  
dubbed; b) when the signal reception is weak; or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard (page 82).  
Rating Blocking (V-Chip) problems  
Recording problems  
• If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within  
5 seconds. The PIN code you previously stored will be cleared (page 93).  
• The V-Chip feature is available for the U.S. V-Chip system only (page 94).  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 67), open the  
POP window (page 76), or open the FAV SCAN multi-window (page 78). If you attempt to do so, the message  
“Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen.  
• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to change analog channels while the recording is in  
progress. If you are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change digital channels while the  
recording is in progress. This is because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog) will be locked  
on the channel that is currently recording.  
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than the  
TV’s remote control to start recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied during  
recording (POP mode, FAV SCAN mode, changing inputs,) the recorded audio and/or video may not be what  
you intended to record. See pages 67 and 71.  
• If you connected a Symbio™ AVHD recorder, in order to use its full functionality, you must first set up the  
TV Guide On Screen® system (page 23 and Chapter 2).  
“Now Booting” message  
appears on-screen  
If you unplug the power cord while the TV is on, when you plug the power cord in again, the  
message “Now Booting…” will display on-screen until the TV enters standby mode. This is normal  
and is not a sign of malfunction.  
TV stops responding to controls  
Other problems  
• If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel touchpad and you cannot  
turn off the TV, press and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.  
• If your TV’s problem has not been addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended solution has  
not worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 52.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
98  
HM95_R2_097-102_061505  
98  
6/27/05, 8:15 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
LED indications  
The green and red LEDs on the TV front touchpad (to the left of the POWER button) indicate the TV’s status, as described below.  
• Red ON (solid) and Green OFF = The TV power cord is plugged in.  
• Green ON (solid) and Red OFF = A recording is in progress while the TV is OFF.  
• Red ON (solid) and Green ON (solid) = A recording is in progress while the TV is ON.  
• Green and/or Red blinking (see table below).  
Note: If the TV loses A/C power (e.g., a power outage occurs or the power cord is unplugged),  
when power is restored, the green LED will blink while the TV is booting until the remote  
control is usable. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction.  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
TV front touchpad  
Red LED  
Green LED  
LED Indication  
Condition  
Solution  
1) Green blinks continuously The lamp unit door is not seated  
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Review “How to  
replace the lamp unit” on pages 104–105 to ensure that the lamp  
door is installed securely. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba  
Authorized Service Center.  
at 3-second intervals.  
Red blinks continuously  
at 0.5-second intervals.  
properly.  
2) Green blinks continuously The lamp is not working properly. The TV will automatically try to restart itself eight times (see item  
at 0.5-second intervals;  
#3).  
Red is ON (solid).  
3) Green and Red blink  
continuously at  
The lamp is not working properly Turn the TV OFF and then ON again. If the problem persists,  
after the eighth automatic restart  
(see item #2).  
replace the lamp unit (see pages 103–105). If the problem still  
exists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
1-second intervals.  
4) Green is OFF;  
An abnormal temperature  
Red blinks at 0.2-second increase has occurred.  
Turn OFF the TV. Check to make sure all slots and openings in the  
TV cabinet are not covered, blocked, or dusty. Turn ON the TV  
again. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service  
Center.  
intervals 4 times (repeat).  
5) Green is OFF;  
Red blinks continuously  
at 0.5-second intervals.  
Abnormal operation  
(including cooling fan stop).  
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord  
in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a  
Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
6) Green is OFF;  
Red blinks continuously  
at 1-second intervals.  
Abnormal operation of BUS line.  
The color wheel has stopped.  
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord  
in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a  
Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
7) Green is OFF;  
Red blinks at 0.2-second  
intervals 3 times (repeat).  
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord  
in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a  
Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
99  
HM95_R2_097-102_061505  
99  
6/27/05, 6:29 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
TV Guide On Screen® FAQs  
The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen® system. The answers represent the most likely solutions  
to the problem.  
After you set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (Chapter 5), the  
program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on  
the TV. You can turn off the automatic program guide (see page 40)  
and instead press the TV GUIDE button on the remote control to  
manually open the TV Guide On Screen® program guide.  
7. Q: I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial  
setup of the TV Guide On Screen® system again?  
A: No. The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide  
On Screen® system memory.  
Note: For Cable box users, the TV must be OFF and the Cable  
box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen® system to  
receive channel line-up information.  
SETUP  
1. Q: What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code  
8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable to  
changes?  
the G-LINK® input on the TV?  
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information  
(see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to  
receive new data.  
A: See Chapter 2: Connecting your TV in this manual.  
You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen® prompts  
during VCR or Cable box setup.  
9. Q: When will I be able to view my TV program listings and  
2. Q: What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice  
use other TV Guide On Screen® system features?  
versa?  
A: You will be able to use initial program listings within 24  
hours of initial setup. It may take up to one week to receive  
the full eight days of program listings.  
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input  
information and rescan channels for the new input (see  
Chapter 3 for details).  
10. Q: What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup?  
A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using the owner’s  
manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba’s  
National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811.  
3. Q: What if I change cable boxes?  
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input  
information and rescan channels for the new input (see  
Chapter 3 for details).  
11. Q: If I make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to  
the previous step?  
A: Complete the remaining setup steps. When “Confirming  
Your Settings” appears, select “No, repeat setup process.”  
Follow the on-screen prompts and input the correct  
information.  
4. Q: I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable.  
What do I do?  
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input  
information and rescan channels for the new input (see  
Chapter 3 for details).  
12. Q: What if the channel number is not visible on my cable  
box?  
A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display  
once the channel changes. Watch the box carefully when  
testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel  
changes to 09.  
5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I  
change my Setup information?  
13. Q: Why wont my VCR turn on?  
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.  
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information  
(see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to  
receive new data.  
A: There are several possibilities:  
a) An incorrect or “no VCR” code was entered during the  
TV Guide On Screen® initial setup. Press the GUIDE  
button on the remote control, and then press to  
highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight “Change system  
settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow the on-screen  
prompts to select the correct VCR information.  
6. Q: Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide  
On Screen® system to be ready for use?  
b) Make sure the G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable is connected  
correctly (see page 25).  
A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations in  
your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen® system data  
and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and  
listings data.  
c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer.  
d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
100  
HM95_R2_097-102_061505  
100  
6/27/05, 6:29 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
TV Guide On Screen® FAQs (continued)  
20. Q: After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars  
CHANNEL LINE-UPS & LISTINGS  
14. Q: Why arent all my channels initially displayed?  
(****). What does that mean?  
A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to  
inform you of a show’s quality. The more stars, the better  
the rating.  
A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are  
automatically displayed. The user may use the “Change  
channel display” feature to turn ON or OFF additional  
channels.  
21. Q: What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search  
Note: Even though you have the option of enabling many  
more channels, the system may not have the memory capacity  
to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them.  
screens indicate?  
A: Green = Sports; Dark Blue = Children’s; Purple = Movies;  
Teal = Other Show.  
15. Q: When I opened the TV Guide On Screen® system, I was  
asked to choose from more than one channel lineup.  
What should I do?  
22. Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of  
channels on the TV Guide On Screen® system?  
A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your  
area. If after you choose the lineup, you want to make  
changes to it, highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to  
select Change Channel Display. Follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
A: See the “Change channel display” section in the TV Guide  
On Screen® owner’s manual (see page 65).  
23. Q: Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong  
number?  
A: There are several possibilities (see page 65 for details):  
16. Q: Why do all my channels display No Listing?”  
A: The TV Guide On Screen® system has not yet received its  
data download. The phrase “No Listings“ will be replaced  
with program information during the next download cycle,  
which will occur within the next 24-hour period.  
a) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change  
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup is  
incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.  
b) Channel line-up changes have not yet been processed. Use  
the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments.  
17. Q: Why do some of my channels display No Listing?”  
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly (that is, the wrong  
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.  
A: There are several possibilities:  
a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in  
Change channel display) and TV Guide On Screen® has  
yet to receive its next data download.  
b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download  
of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.  
c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended  
period of time and the TV Guide On Screen® system was  
unable to receive program listings during the scheduled  
download cycle.  
d) Poor reception caused some of the data to be missed.  
e) The cable box was turned OFF. The TV power cord must  
be plugged in and the cable box must be ON.  
g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFF. If the connection  
includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo  
connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON.  
24. Q: Why doesnt the program highlighted match up with  
the video window on my TV screen?  
A: There are several possibilities (see page 65 for details):  
a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled  
program listing and the TV Guide On Screen® system has  
not yet been updated.  
b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or  
boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported  
by the TV Guide On Screen® system).  
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly. (i.e., the wrong  
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.  
d) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change  
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup  
is incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.)  
18. Q: A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen® system reads  
e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock.  
No Listing.What does that mean?  
A: Show information for that entry was not available during  
the last TV Guide On Screen® system information update  
(download). Show information is updated on a daily basis.  
25. Q: Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the  
TV Guide On Screen® display screen?  
A: Yes. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make  
adjustments (see page 65). Highlight the station call letters  
to be moved, then use the BLUE, GREEN, and/or  
Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.  
19. Q: I have seen the word downloadin reference to the TV  
Guide On Screen system. What does that mean?  
A: “Download” refers to the times throughout the day when  
the TV Guide On Screen® system is receiving channel and  
listings information from your Cable or over-the-air  
antenna transmission.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
101  
HM95_R2_097-102_061505  
101  
6/27/05, 6:29 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
TV Guide On Screen® FAQs (continued)  
32. Q: Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen® system?  
OPERATIONS  
If so, how do I find it?  
26. Q: How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide  
A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,  
Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO  
key on the remote control. An expanded Info Box displays  
additional help information. Press INFO again to close  
the box.  
On Screen® system?  
A: SEARCH lets you find shows by keyword, alphabetically,  
or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children,  
Educational, News, Variety, Series).  
Help is also available in a panel menu. Press INFO to  
display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to close  
the box.  
27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the  
TV Guide On Screen® system. Whats wrong?  
A: There are several possibilities:  
RECORD/REMIND  
33. Q: Can I tune to a different channel while recording a  
a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide  
On Screen® initial setup. Redo initial setup.  
b) The G-LINK® (IR blaster) cable may not be connected  
properly (see page 25).  
program?  
A: No.  
c) The cable box has no remote capability and is  
incompatible.  
34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in  
the GUIDE?  
A: There is no limit to the number of shows that can be  
programmed into the schedule memory.  
28. Q: How do I resize or close the Info window?  
A: Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the  
Info window. Press the INFO button again to close the  
Info window.  
35. Q: If a program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular  
basis, does it count as five?  
A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE,  
REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in  
the RECORD stack memory.  
29. Q: Is there a way to go directly to the next days listings  
without scrolling through each time slot?  
A: Yes. In LISTINGS, highlight the station you want to look  
ahead and use the Channel Number buttons on the remote  
control to enter “24.” In the resulting menu, press z two  
times to scroll down to select the HOURS AHEAD  
option, and then press ENTER. You also can use the  
SKIP/SEARCH button on the remote control.  
36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the  
recorded shows I have already programmed?  
A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have  
been programmed will be retained in the memory of the  
TV Guide On Screen® system. Titles will appear once  
listings are restored.  
30. Q: Why cant I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue  
screen.  
37. Q: Can I set a Record or Remind event without  
highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen®  
system?  
A: There are several possibilities (without a cable box):  
a) The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly.  
A: Yes. TV Guide On Screen® has a Manual Record and  
Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar,  
and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER,  
and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel  
number, and so forth.  
b) The incorrect channel lineup was selected. Press GUIDE  
and then to highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight  
“Change system settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow  
the on-screen prompts to select the correct channel lineup.  
31. Q: Why wont my VCR change channels and why does it  
38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?  
change to the wrong channel?  
A: Once—records/reminds the show one time.  
A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box):  
Daily (manual only)—records the time, channel, input,  
recorder combination Monday through Friday.  
a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the  
VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your  
cable system.  
Regularly— records/reminds the show every time the show  
airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.  
b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectly.  
Refer to your VCR owner’s manual or contact your Cable  
TV company for proper wiring procedures.  
Weekly— records/reminds the show each time the show  
airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and  
starts at the same time.  
Off (not cancel)—keeps the show in the Schedule list but  
will not record/remind the show until the frequency is  
changed.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
102  
HM95_R2_097-102_061505  
102  
6/27/05, 6:29 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Appendix  
11  
Lamp unit replacement and care  
When to replace the lamp unit  
You should replace the lamp unit:  
Replacing the lamp unit  
(User-replaceable component)  
• if the picture darkens and/or colors fade;  
• if the screen (lamp) does not light (LED indication #3, page  
99); or  
• if you hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which  
may indicate a lamp rupture (LED indication #3, page 99).  
WARNING: RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER  
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED  
HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN  
THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death  
or serious injury.  
To obtain a replacement lamp unit:  
Web  
Contact  
Call toll-free  
1-800-631-3811.  
In warranty www.tacp.toshiba.com/service  
The light source for this TV is a mercury lamp with internal  
atmospheric pressure that increases during use. The lamp has a  
limited service life that varies depending on product use and  
user settings.  
Consult your  
consumer  
electronics dealer  
for availability.  
Out of  
www.ceaccessories.toshiba.com  
warranty  
As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use  
projection lamps as a light source, the brightness of the lamp in  
this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service life and  
will generally decrease over time. The average useful service life  
for the lamp is approximately 8,000 hours in Low Power mode  
or 6,000 hours in High Bright mode. See “Selecting the Lamp  
mode” on page 75 for information on switching the lamp mode.  
Because these are averages, some lamps will require earlier  
replacement.  
Use the replacement lamp unit model listed below only.  
Using any other lamp may cause damage to the TV  
and/or lamp.  
CAUTION: Always replace with same  
type lamp unit: Model No. D95-LMP  
(Stock no. 23311153)  
Note : The lamp is warranted only for the periods and to the  
extent set forth in the Limited Warranty applicable to this set,  
which is a substantially shorter period of time than the average  
useful service period. See “Limited United States Warranty” on  
page 107.  
If you use the lamp beyond its service life:  
• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of  
the picture; and  
• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced  
and the lamp may rupture (often making a loud noise when  
this happens). If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate  
until the lamp unit is replaced.  
CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care.  
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement  
by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional  
abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children  
or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
103  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
103  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Lamp unit replacement and care (continued)  
4. Using a manual Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two screws on  
How to replace the lamp unit  
the lamp unit.  
WARNING: RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER  
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED  
HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN  
THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death  
or serious injury.  
Required tools:  
• Manual Phillips screwdriver  
Lamp unit screws  
• Soft, lint-free gloves.  
Optional tool: 5/32” or 4mm Allen wrench.  
WARNING: RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
1. Turn off the TV and unplug the power cord.  
The lamp unit door is provided with an  
interlock to reduce the risk of electric shock and excessive  
ultraviolet radiation. Never defeat its purpose or attempt  
to service without removing the lamp unit door  
completely. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in  
death or serious injury.  
WARNING: Eye damage may result from  
directly viewing the light produced by this  
lamp. Always turn off the TV and unplug the  
power cord before opening the lamp unit door.  
2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (1) hour  
before replacing it.  
5. Grasp the lamp unit handle and gently pull the lamp unit  
straight out of the TV. Set the old lamp unit aside (see  
“Disposing of the used lamp unit” on page 105).  
CAUTION: HOT SURFACE!  
The temperature of the lamp  
immediately after use  
exceeds 392°F (200°C).  
Touching the lamp before it has cooled will result in  
severe burns. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT  
LEAST ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT.  
3. On the lamp unit door on the side of the TV, loosen the  
thumb screw by hand or by using a 5/32” or 4mm Allen  
wrench, and then remove the lamp unit door.  
TV back  
Note:Wear soft, lint-free  
gloves when replacing  
the lamp unit.  
Thumb  
screw  
Lamp unit door detail  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
104  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
104  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Lamp unit replacement and care (continued)  
8. Reattach the lamp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks  
on the left side of the lamp unit door inside the opening in  
the TV cabinet.  
How to replace the lamp unit (continued)  
6. Carefully insert the new lamp unit straight into the TV until  
it is fully seated.  
Insert the hooks inside  
the TV cabinet opening.  
Lamp unit door  
9. Replace the thumb screw and hand-tighten.  
Thumb screw  
(hand-tighten only)  
Note :  
• Never subject the lamp unit to excessive shock.  
• Never touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise get it dirty.  
Doing so may affect the image quality and reduce the service life of  
the lamp. See “Cleaning the lamp unit glass” below.  
Lamp unit door  
NOTE : Make sure  
the lamp unit door is  
installed securely; otherwise,  
the TV may not turn on.  
CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS  
If you accidentally touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise  
get it dirty, wipe it with a lint-free lens cleaning cloth (such  
as a cloth for cleaning camera lenses or eyeglasses).  
10. Plug in the power cord and turn on the TV. After the initial  
warmup period (which may take several seconds for full  
picture brightness), the TV should operate normally. If any of  
the following conditions exist, turn off the TV, unplug the  
power cord, and repeat steps 1–9 to ensure that the lamp unit  
and lamp unit door are installed correctly:  
CAUTION: NEVER clean a hot lamp with  
any type of flammable liquid or aerosol  
cleaning agent. Many ordinary cleaning agents  
• No picture • Dark picture • TV will not turn on  
(such as glass cleaners) contain chemicals that may be  
flammable at certain temperatures. If the lamp unit is not allowed  
to cool for at least one (1) hour, such chemicals may ignite.  
If, after repeating steps 1–9, the problem still exists:  
Call TACP Consumer Solutions at 1-800-631-3811.  
7. Using a manual Phillips screwdriver, tighten the two lamp  
unit screws.  
Disposing of the used lamp unit  
• Place the used lamp unit in the empty box from the new unit.  
• Keep the lamp unit out of reach of children and pets.  
Note: Hand-tighten only. Do not use an electric screwdriver.  
CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care.  
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by  
consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional or  
accidental abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by  
children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.  
• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for  
your area.  
Lamp unit screws  
(use manual Phillips screwdriver only)  
NOTE : The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may  
be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or  
recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries  
Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
NOTE : Make sure the lamp unit and screws  
are installed securely; otherwise, the TV may not  
turn on and the lamp life may be shortened.  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
105  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
105  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Specifications  
NOTE:  
• This model complies with the specifications listed below.  
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.  
Television System  
Video/Audio Terminals (continued)  
NTSC standard  
ATSC standard (8VSB)  
Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, unencrypted*)  
HDMIINPUT:  
HDMI compliant (type A connector)  
HDCP compliant  
E-EDID** compliant  
Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p  
HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling  
frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample  
*Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV  
using a CableCARD.™ See page 12 for details.  
Channel Coverage  
VHF: 2 through 13  
UHF: 14 through 69  
NOTE: This TV does not provide HDMI OUTPUT.  
VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording):  
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.  
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,  
2.2 k ohm or less)  
Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-1, A through I)  
Super band (J through W)  
Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)  
Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135)  
VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:  
0–300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,  
2.2 k ohm or less)  
Power Source  
120 V AC, 60 Hz  
G-LINK® and IR OUTPUT:  
Power Consumption  
3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied)  
240 W (average)  
38 W in standby mode (using a CableCARD)  
IEEE1394 INPUT/OUTPUT:  
34 W in standby mode (without a CableCARD)  
IEEE1394 compliant 4-pin  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:  
Audio Power  
15 W + 15 W  
Optical type  
Dimensions  
Speaker Type  
46HM95: Width: 53-1/8 inches (1349 mm)  
Height: 31-13/16 inches (808 mm)  
Depth: 15-1/4 inches (387 mm)  
52HM95: Width: 58-3/8 inches (1483 mm)  
Height: 35-1/16 inches (891 mm)  
Depth: 15-1/4 inches (387 mm)  
62HM95: Width: 67-1/16 inches (1703 mm)  
Height: 40-15/16 inches (1040 mm)  
Depth: 18-3/16 inches (462 mm)  
Main: Two 4-inch (10cm) round  
Tweeter: Two 1-5/8-inch (4cm) round  
Video/Audio Terminals  
S-VIDEO INPUT:  
Y : 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.  
C : 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm  
VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:  
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.  
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,  
22 k ohm or greater)  
Weight  
46HM95: 78 lbs (35.38 kg)  
52HM95: 83 lbs (37.65 kg)  
62HM95: 99 lbs (44.90 kg)  
ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT:  
Y : 1V(p-p), 75 ohm  
PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm  
PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm  
Supplied Accessories  
• Two dual-wand IR blaster cables  
• Remote control with two size “AA” alkaline batteries  
• Owner’s Manual (this book)  
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater  
Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p  
NOTE: This TV does not provide ColorStream HD OUTPUT.  
Optional Stands  
46HM95: ST4665  
52HM95: ST5265  
62HM95: ST6265  
_________  
** E-EDID = Enhanced-Extended Display Identification  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
106  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
106  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Limited United States Warranty  
for DLP™ Television Models  
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following  
limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.  
Your Responsibility  
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING  
CONDITIONS:  
(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of  
purchase..  
(2) All warranty servicing of this DLP™ Television must be performed by an  
Authorized TACP Service Station.  
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL  
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP  
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER  
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.  
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this DLP™ Television is  
purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.  
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer  
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered  
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna  
systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs,  
DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE1394 devices, and  
any other connected signal source device are your responsibility..  
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited  
above, and do not extend to any DLP™ Television or parts that have  
been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DLP™ Television or  
parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning  
or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper  
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use  
or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DLP™ Television and  
connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the  
serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.  
DLPTELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE  
OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA  
AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
DLPTELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A.,  
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED  
IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor  
TACP warrants this DLP™ Television and its parts against defects in materials  
or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail  
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACPS OPTION,  
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR  
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR  
LABOR. During this period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will  
come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the  
type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or  
the DLP™ Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for  
repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.  
How to Obtain Warranty Service  
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing  
the section titled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:  
(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station, visit TACP’s  
website at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or contact TACP’s  
Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.  
(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to  
the TACP Authorized Service Station.  
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit  
TACP warrants the original lamp unit contained in this DLP™ Television  
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after  
the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL,  
AT TACPS OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A  
NEW OR REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.  
LABOR CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE YOUR  
RESPONSIBILITY AND ARE NOT COVERED UNDER THIS  
For additional information, visit TACP’s web site:  
www.tacp.toshiba.com.  
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE  
U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user-replaceable component.  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED  
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY  
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS  
HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND  
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,  
AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE  
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED  
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DLP™  
TELEVISION).  
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,  
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.  
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any  
obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of  
the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days  
from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This  
limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any  
state of the U.S.A.  
Rental Units  
The warranty for DLP™ Television rental units begins on the date of the first  
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,  
whichever comes first.  
Limited Warranty for Commercial Units  
TACP warrants DLP™ Televisions, including the lamp units contained therein,  
that are sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are  
warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety  
(90) days after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD,  
TACP WILL, AT TACPS OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE  
PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO  
YOU.  
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration  
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DLP™ television.  
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your  
DLP™ Television online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as  
possible. By registering your DLP™ Television you will enable TACP to bring  
you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to  
contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the  
Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not  
diminish your warranty rights.  
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU  
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE  
TO STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW  
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY,  
WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR  
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.  
THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU  
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.  
05  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
107  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
107  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by  
contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a  
charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS ISAND  
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,  
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED  
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This  
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).  
A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by  
contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a  
charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.  
USB Protocol Copyright © 2005 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are  
met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All Rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young  
(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with  
Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use  
so long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions  
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES,  
etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this  
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is  
Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).  
3. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its  
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from  
this software without specified prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.  
AND CONTRIBUTORS AS ISAND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Copyright remains Eric Youngs, and as such any Copyright notices in the  
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric  
Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library  
used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of  
conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  
display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).” The  
word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being  
used are not cryptographic related.  
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in  
the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
(eay@cryptsoft.com).  
OpenSSL 0.9.7d Copyright © 1998-2000 the OpenSSL Project. All Rights  
reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  
display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software  
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  
(http://openssl.org).  
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “Open SSL Project” must not be used  
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior  
written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-  
core@openssl.org.  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSLnor may  
“Open SSLappear in their names without prior written permission of the  
OpenSSL Project.  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  
acknowledgement: “This product includes software developed by the  
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).”  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or derivative thereof) from the  
apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:  
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson  
(tjh@cryptosoft.com).”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS ISAND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for  
any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed,  
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution  
license (including the GNU Public License).  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
108  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
108  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Notes  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
109  
HM95_R2_103-109_061505  
109  
6/27/05, 6:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Index  
A
E F G H I J  
Antenna cables ......................................................................... 11  
Audio player ............................................................................... 87  
Audio quality adjustments.................................................... 85  
Audio system connection...................................................... 20  
Auto aspect................................................................................. 74  
Auto power off........................................................................... 92  
AVHD ..................................................................................... 23, 50  
EIA-775......................................................................................... 22  
FAV SCAN button .............................................................. 44, 78  
Factory defaults, restore TV .......................................... 52, 79  
Favorite channels .............................................................. 44, 78  
Features, TV ...................................................................................7  
Focus ............................................................................................. 86  
Front of the TV..............................................................................9  
Front panel lock ........................................................................ 96  
Front panel touch pad ....................................................... 9, 36  
GameTimer™ .............................................................................. 96  
G-LINK® connection ............................................................... 25  
HDMI™ connection ................................................................. 19  
IEEE1394...................................................................................... 22  
INPUT button ............................................................................. 67  
Input lock..................................................................................... 95  
Installation, care, and service............................................ 3, 4  
Installation, setup ........................................................................8  
Integrated digital tuning...........................................................7  
IR blaster ..................................................................................... 21  
JPEG ....................................................................................... 87–90  
B
Back of the TV ........................................................................... 10  
Blocking channels.................................................................... 95  
C
Cable box connection...................................................... 14, 16  
CableCARD™ ............................................................................. 12  
CableClear™ DNR .................................................................... 80  
Cables ........................................................................................... 11  
Camcorder connection........................................................... 13  
CH yz buttons .................................................................. 42, 71  
CH RTN button .......................................................................... 71  
Channel Number buttons .............................................. 42, 71  
Channel programming:  
Automatic programming .................................................. 42  
Manually adding and deleting ....................................... 43  
Cinema mode............................................................................. 75  
Closed captions ........................................................................ 82  
Color temperature .................................................................... 80  
ColorStream® ...................................................................... 10, 17  
Connecting devices .......................................................... 12–25  
CompactFlash® memory cards .....................................87, 88  
Component video cables ...................................................... 11  
Component video (ColorStream®) .............................. 10, 17  
L
Labeling video inputs ............................................................. 68  
Lamp mode ................................................................................. 75  
Lamp unit replacement .............................................. 103–105  
Language selection ................................................................. 41  
Last mode memory feature .................................................. 92  
LED indications ............................................................... 8, 9, 99  
Locking video inputs............................................................... 95  
LOCKS menu.............................................................................. 93  
Channels, blocking ............................................................. 95  
Enable rating blocking ...................................................... 94  
GameTimer™ ......................................................................... 96  
New PIN code ...................................................................... 93  
Unlocking programs temporarily .................................. 95  
Video inputs, locking ......................................................... 95  
D
Device connections .......................................................... 12–25  
Defaults, restore TV factory ................................................. 52  
Digital Audio Out...................................................................... 20  
Digital signal meter ................................................................. 52  
DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) .......................................... 80  
Dolby Digital........................................................................ 20, 86  
Double-window POP feature............................................... 76  
DVD player connection................................................... 16, 17  
D-VHS .................................................................................... 23, 50  
DVI connection.......................................................................... 19  
Dynamic Contrast..................................................................... 81  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
110  
HM95_R2_110-111_061505  
110  
6/27/05, 7:10 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
Index  
(continued)  
M
S
Memory cards..................................................................... 87–90  
Memory Stick™ memory cards .....................................87, 88  
Menu system....................................................................... 35, 36  
MMC memory cards .........................................................87, 88  
MP3......................................................................................... 87–90  
MPEG-2 digital video signals .............................................. 22  
MPEG Noise Reduction ......................................................... 81  
MTS feature ................................................................................ 84  
MUTE button.............................................................................. 84  
Safety, care, installation, and service .............................2–5  
SAP sound................................................................................... 84  
Satellite receiver connection ............................................... 15  
Sub-bass (SBS)......................................................................... 85  
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture................................... 74  
SD (Secure Digital™) memory cards ..........................87, 88  
Service .............................................................................................4  
Setup, TV...............................................................................36, 41  
Setup, TV Guide On Screen® system................................ 37  
Sleep timer .................................................................................. 91  
Speakers ON/OFF .................................................................... 86  
Specifications...........................................................................106  
SRS 3D ......................................................................................... 86  
SRS WOW ................................................................................... 86  
StableSound® ............................................................................. 85  
Stereo sound .............................................................................. 84  
S-video cables ........................................................................... 11  
Symbio™ AVHD recorder ............................................... 23, 50  
System status ............................................................................. 52  
O P Q  
ON/OFF timer ............................................................................ 91  
Optical audio cable ................................................................. 11  
Picture adjustments:  
Color temperature............................................................... 80  
Picture mode ......................................................................... 79  
Picture quality ....................................................................... 79  
Picture-out-picture (POP):  
FAV SCAN button................................................................ 78  
SPLIT button.......................................................................... 76  
Picture scroll............................................................................... 74  
Picture size selection .............................................................. 73  
Picture viewer ............................................................................ 87  
Problems with TV ...............................................................97, 98  
Quick Restart ............................................................................. 51  
T
TheaterNet™ DEVICE and CONTROL buttons ............. 46  
TheaterNet™ control ............................................................... 21  
TheaterNet™ setup .................................................................. 45  
TheaterWide® picture size .................................................... 73  
Time and date setting ............................................................. 50  
Troubleshooting ..................................................................97, 98  
TruBass ......................................................................................... 86  
TV Guide On Screen® .................................................. 8, 37, 53  
R
RECALL button ......................................................................... 84  
Remote control:  
Battery installation .............................................................. 28  
Device code table ........................................................ 33, 34  
Effective range...................................................................... 27  
Functional key chart.................................................... 29, 30  
Learning about the buttons ............................................ 26  
Operational feature reset ................................................. 32  
Programming ........................................................................ 31  
Searching and sampling the code ............................... 31  
Volume lock feature ........................................................... 32  
Restart, Quick ............................................................................ 51  
Restore TV factory defaults.................................................. 52  
V
V-Chip blocking (Locks menu) .................................... 93–95  
VCR connection ................................................................. 13–18  
Video cables ............................................................................... 11  
Video input labels .................................................................... 68  
Video input lock ........................................................................ 95  
W, X  
Warranty..................................................................................... 107  
WOW, SRS................................................................................... 86  
xD-Picture Card™ ...............................................................87, 88  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
111  
HM95_R2_110-111_061505  
111  
6/27/05, 7:10 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM95  
TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.  
HEAD OFFICE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, U.S.A.  
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION:1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A.  
MANUFACTURED BY  
TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.  
CableClear, ColorStream, StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.  
GameTimer, SurfLock, Symbio, and TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.  
Digital Light Processing, DLP™ and the DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
PRINTED IN USA  
(05-06) [A-PDFO]  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
23566650A  
HM95_R2_112_061505  
112  
6/27/05, 6:41 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Techno Source Video Games 0215 MTG User Manual
TiVo DVR SDOC 00091 002 User Manual
Toshiba DVD VCR Combo MW14F52 User Manual
Toshiba Telephone Strata DK User Manual
Transcend Information Network Card TS8~32GSSD34E M User Manual
Uniden All in One Printer 2315+2 User Manual
Vanguard Heating Indoor Fireplace VMH26TN User Manual
Vermont Casting Outdoor Fireplace DVT38S2IN User Manual
Viking Cooktop F20537B EN User Manual
Watlow Electric Network Card SERIES 980 985 User Manual